{"title":"Easter Amp Sale","description":"\u003cp\u003eAmp up your Easter with our biggest amplifier sale of the season, offering huge discounts on guitar, bass, and keyboard amps for every skill level and setup; whether you’re practicing at home or rocking the stage, now’s the perfect time to score powerful, top-quality sound at unbeatable prices with limited-time deals and bundle offers.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"marshall-origin-20-1x10-valve-combo","title":"Marshall Origin ORI20C 20W All Valve Amp Combo","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Origin ORI20C is a 20-watt all-valve guitar combo designed for players seeking expressive British tone, responsive dynamics and practical power control. Its single-channel circuit moves naturally from full, articulate cleans to warm edge-of-breakup sounds and vintage-style overdrive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall’s Powerstem technology provides three output settings—20 watts, approximately 3 watts and approximately 0.5 watts—making the ORI20C suitable for home practice, recording, rehearsals and smaller live performances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 10-inch Celestion VT-Junior speaker gives the combo a focused low-mid punch and clear top-end response, while the Tilt control blends warmer and brighter input voicings. With a footswitchable gain boost, switchable series effects loop and speaker-emulated DI output, the Origin20C combines classic valve character with useful modern flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rpMZ40cfk8k?si=Vh51MmfPTCKXJdTi\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin20C \/ ORI20C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve guitar combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20W, approximately 3W or approximately 0.5W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x 10-inch Celestion VT-Junior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50W, 16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x ECC83 plus 1 x ECC83 phase splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall Powerstem technology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain Boost\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePull-activated and footswitchable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwitchable series effects loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDI Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker-emulated output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall PEDL-90016 included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand New\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic British valve tone with three practical power settings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlues, classic rock, indie, country, recording and pedalboard rigs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall Origin20C?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExpressive All-Valve Marshall Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C delivers the harmonic richness, natural compression and touch-sensitive response associated with a traditional Marshall valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Gain settings produce clear, open sounds with plenty of definition. Increasing the Gain and Master controls introduces progressively more crunch, sustain and power-stage character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier responds closely to picking strength and guitar-volume changes, allowing expressive players to move between cleaner and more driven sounds without constantly adjusting the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThree Power Levels with Powerstem Technology\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall’s Powerstem technology gives the Origin20C three output levels:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh power: 20 watts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMid power: approximately 3 watts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow power: approximately 0.5 watts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt setting provides the greatest projection and clean headroom for rehearsal and performance. Mid power is useful for recording and lower-volume sessions, while the low-power setting makes the amplifier more manageable for home practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEven at its reduced settings, the Origin20C remains capable of producing substantial volume when its Master control is increased.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCelestion VT-Junior Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe built-in 10-inch Celestion VT-Junior is rated at 50 watts and has been selected to complement the amplifier’s vintage-inspired voicing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides a strong low-mid punch, clear high-frequency detail and an immediate response. The smaller speaker also contributes to the Origin20C’s focused sound and portable cabinet dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the amplifier and speaker are housed together, the ORI20C offers the convenience of a self-contained combo without requiring a separate speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFlexible Tilt Control\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tilt control is inspired by the separate Normal and High Treble inputs found on classic Marshall amplifiers such as the JTM45 and 1959 Super Lead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTurning the control towards the warmer side produces greater body and low-mid emphasis. Moving it towards the brighter side adds attack, definition and upper-frequency presence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the two traditional input characters to be blended from a single control, making it easy to optimise the amplifier for different guitars, pickups and pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFootswitchable Gain Boost\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePulling the Gain control activates an additional preamp boost, introducing more drive and a stronger crunch character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe included Marshall PEDL-90016 two-way footswitch allows the boost to be activated remotely. This makes it possible to move from a clean or lightly driven rhythm sound to a more intense lead tone without returning to the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe footswitch’s second button controls the effects loop, allowing connected effects to be switched in and out during a performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSeparate Gain and Master Controls\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C provides separate Gain and Master Volume controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Gain control determines how hard the preamp is driven, while the Master control sets the final output level and influences how strongly the EL34 power section is working.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis arrangement provides more control than a traditional non-master-volume amplifier and supports both clean pedal-platform settings and naturally driven valve sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSwitchable Series Effects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe series effects loop provides a dedicated connection point for delay, reverb, chorus and other effects that can benefit from being placed after the amplifier’s preamp section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe loop can be activated or bypassed using the included footswitch, offering useful control for pedalboard-based live rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeaker-Emulated DI Output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA ¼-inch DI output provides a speaker-emulated signal for connection to a recording interface, external recorder or mixing desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe emulation helps create a more guitar-speaker-like direct sound than a standard unfiltered line output, making the Origin20C useful for recording and live sound reinforcement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose an All-Valve Guitar Combo?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn all-valve combo combines the amplifier, valve power section and speaker within one portable enclosure. This removes the need to transport and connect a separate amplifier head and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eValve amplifiers are valued for their dynamic response, harmonic complexity and natural transition from clean sounds into overdrive. Rather than remaining completely consistent at every playing level, the sound changes in response to picking strength, input level and control settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C is particularly practical because its three power settings provide greater control over this behaviour. Players can use the full output for performance, then select a lower setting when recording or practising at home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBlues and Classic-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C excels at warm cleans, edge-of-breakup sounds and vintage British crunch. It is especially well suited to expressive blues, classic rock and roots-influenced playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedalboard Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts open single-channel response provides an excellent foundation for boost, overdrive, fuzz, modulation, delay and reverb pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlayers Who Control Their Sound from the Guitar\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe responsive valve circuit cleans up naturally as the guitar’s volume is reduced, allowing the player to control gain and intensity directly from the instrument.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHome and Studio Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe approximately 3-watt and 0.5-watt settings make the amplifier more adaptable for home and recording use than a fixed-output 20-watt valve combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRehearsing and Gigging Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt setting offers useful projection for rehearsals, smaller venues and performances where the amplifier can be reinforced through a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlayers Buying Their First Valve Amplifier\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe self-contained combo format, straightforward control panel, output reduction and included footswitch make the Origin20C an accessible introduction to traditional valve-amplifier response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall Origin20C all-valve guitar combo amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall PEDL-90016 two-way footswitch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable UK mains cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve guitar combo amplifier\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin20C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTechnology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMid-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 3W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 0.5W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Reduction System\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall Powerstem\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstrument Input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ¼-inch jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront-Panel Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain with Pull Boost, Tilt, Bass, Middle, Treble, Master, Presence and Output Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain Boost\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePull-activated and footswitchable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Amplifier Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x 10-inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCelestion VT-Junior\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Power Rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwitchable series effects loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop Connections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e¼-inch Send and Return\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDI Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ¼-inch speaker-emulated output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 x ¼-inch jack sockets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch Connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ¼-inch jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded Footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall PEDL-90016\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch Functions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain Boost and Effects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-In Effects\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack with classic Marshall styling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e520mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13.9kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDesigned and Engineered\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVietnam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Origin20C operates from UK mains power using the supplied detachable mains cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore switching the amplifier on, set the Master and Gain controls to a low level. After powering on, allow the valves a short period to warm up before gradually increasing the volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe internal 16Ω Celestion speaker is connected to the dedicated 16Ω speaker output. When connecting an extension cabinet, use only one of the approved configurations:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 16Ω speaker load through the dedicated 16Ω output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 8Ω speaker load through the designated 8Ω output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo 16Ω cabinets through the two 8Ω outputs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a dedicated speaker cable when connecting an external cabinet. A screened guitar or instrument cable is not suitable for carrying a speaker-level signal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison and Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall Origin20H\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H provides the same core amplifier features in a separate head format. It allows players to choose their preferred cabinet and speaker configuration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C is the more convenient choice for players wanting an integrated, portable amplifier and speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall DSL20CR\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DSL20CR provides two channels, built-in reverb and considerably more preamp gain. It is better suited to players who need clean, crunch and higher-gain sounds without using additional pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C offers a more open, vintage-inspired response and is particularly effective as a clean or edge-of-breakup pedal platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SV20C Studio Vintage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C is based on the classic 1959 Super Lead and features a traditional four-input, non-master-volume design. It offers a more authentic Plexi-style playing experience and is manufactured in England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C adds three power settings, a master volume, Tilt control, gain boost and included footswitch at a more accessible price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SC20C Studio Classic\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SC20C is inspired by the JCM800 2203 and produces tighter, more aggressive preamp overdrive. It is particularly suitable for hard rock, punk and traditional heavy metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C focuses more strongly on clean headroom, dynamic low-gain sounds and vintage-style crunch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall Origin50C\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin50C uses a larger 12-inch speaker and provides greater output, low-frequency depth and clean headroom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C is lighter, more compact and easier to drive at moderate volume levels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Marshall Origin20C suitable for home use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its approximately 3-watt and 0.5-watt settings provide greater control than a fixed 20-watt valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can still become loud when the Gain and Master controls are increased, so the low-power mode does not guarantee silent or extremely quiet operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have more than one channel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Origin20C is a single-channel amplifier. Different levels of gain can be created using the Gain, Master, Pull Boost and guitar-volume controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the Tilt control do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tilt control blends between warmer Normal-style and brighter High Treble-style input voicings. It recreates the tonal principle of blending the inputs on traditional multi-input Marshall amplifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is the gain boost activated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe boost can be activated by pulling the Gain control or pressing the corresponding button on the included two-way footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the second footswitch button control?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe second button switches the series effects loop on and off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Origin20C have reverb?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The amplifier does not include built-in reverb. A reverb pedal can be connected through the effects loop or before the main instrument input.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it a good pedal-platform amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its clear, dynamic single-channel circuit works particularly well with boost, overdrive, distortion and fuzz pedals. Delay, reverb and modulation effects can be connected through the effects loop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an external speaker cabinet be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The rear panel provides outputs for compatible 8Ω and 16Ω speaker configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe total connected impedance must match the selected output, and a dedicated speaker cable must be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it produce high-gain sounds?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C focuses on clean, edge-of-breakup and vintage crunch sounds. Heavier distortion can be achieved by combining its gain boost with an overdrive, boost or distortion pedal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be connected directly to a recording interface?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The speaker-emulated DI output can send a direct signal to a compatible audio interface, recorder or mixing desk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a headphone output?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Origin20C does not include a dedicated headphone connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require valve biasing after replacing the power valves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20C uses a cathode-biased power stage, so its replacement power valves do not require a conventional manual bias adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Origin20C is a superb choice for guitarists who want responsive British valve tone in a practical, self-contained combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts three Powerstem settings make it adaptable for home, studio and live use, while the Tilt control, gain boost and separate Master Volume provide more flexibility than a traditional vintage amplifier. The Celestion VT-Junior speaker adds a focused, articulate response that suits clean sounds, vintage crunch and pedal-based rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor blues, classic rock, indie, country and players building their sound around a pedalboard, the Origin20C offers excellent tone and versatility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices across our extensive product range\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTrusted independent UK musical instrument retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading your current equipment? Fair Deal Music accepts guitars, amplifiers, effects, keyboards, drums, studio equipment and other musical instruments in part exchange.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team for a friendly, no-obligation valuation and put the value of your existing equipment towards your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":36503930831004,"sku":"ORI20C","price":449.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/origin_20c.jpg?v=1625222627"},{"product_id":"marshall-ori20h-origin-20w-valve-head","title":"Marshall Origin 20 20w Guitar Valve Amplifier Head","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Origin20H is a versatile 20-watt all-valve guitar amplifier head built for players who want classic British tone, responsive dynamics and practical volume control. Its single-channel design produces everything from full, articulate clean sounds to warm vintage crunch, making it an excellent foundation for expressive playing and pedal-based rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall’s Powerstem technology provides three output settings—20 watts, approximately 3 watts and approximately 0.5 watts—allowing the amplifier to move comfortably between live performance, studio recording and home practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tilt control recreates the tonal blending possibilities of classic multi-input Marshall amplifiers through one straightforward control, while the pull-boost Gain control adds extra drive when required. A switchable series effects loop, speaker-emulated DI output and included two-way footswitch complete a highly adaptable modern valve head with unmistakable Marshall character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rpMZ40cfk8k?si=cUGlU-fJTwxq2i2U\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin20H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve guitar amplifier head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20W, approximately 3W or approximately 0.5W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall Powerstem technology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x ECC83 plus 1 x ECC83 phase splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain Boost\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePull-boost control and footswitch operation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwitchable series effects loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDI Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker-emulated ¼-inch output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall PEDL-90016 included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand New\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic British valve tones with three practical power levels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlues, classic rock, indie, country, recording and pedalboard rigs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall Origin20H?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic British Valve Character\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H is designed around the rich harmonics, open response and expressive dynamics associated with classic Marshall valve amplifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt lower Gain settings, it offers clear and full-bodied clean sounds that respond naturally to different guitars and pickup types. Increasing the Gain and Master controls introduces progressively more edge, compression and vintage-style overdrive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result is an amplifier that reacts closely to picking strength, guitar volume adjustments and playing technique rather than producing a heavily compressed or processed sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThree Power Levels with Powerstem Technology\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall’s Powerstem technology allows the Origin20H to operate at three different output levels:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh: 20 watts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMid: approximately 3 watts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow: approximately 0.5 watts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of using a conventional pentode-to-triode reduction system, Powerstem lowers the voltage around the power amplifier. This helps retain the amplifier’s fundamental tonal character across the different output settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 20-watt mode provides the greatest projection and clean headroom, while the lower settings make it easier to explore valve compression and overdrive in recording rooms, smaller spaces and home environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInnovative Tilt Control\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tilt control is inspired by the Normal and High Treble inputs found on classic Marshall amplifiers such as the JTM45 and 1959 Super Lead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTurning the control towards the Normal side creates a warmer, fuller response with greater low-mid body. Moving it towards the High Treble side adds brightness, attack and upper-frequency definition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the character of the input stage to be adjusted with one control instead of bridging and blending separate amplifier inputs with a patch cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFootswitchable Gain Boost\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePulling the Gain control activates an additional boost within the preamp, adding extra drive, intensity and crunch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe included Marshall PEDL-90016 two-way footswitch allows the boost to be activated remotely, making it useful for moving from a cleaner or lightly driven rhythm sound into a stronger lead or heavier rhythm tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe second footswitch button controls the effects loop, allowing connected effects to be introduced or removed during a performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMaster Volume Control\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSeparate Gain and Master controls provide greater flexibility than a traditional non-master-volume amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Gain control determines how strongly the preamp is driven, while the Master controls the final output level. Higher Master settings also allow the EL34 power section to contribute more compression, harmonic complexity and classic valve overdrive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes the Origin20H suitable for both clean pedal-platform settings and more traditional amplifier-driven sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExcellent Pedal Platform\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin series is particularly well suited to players who create their sound with effects pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts open clean and edge-of-breakup tones provide an excellent foundation for boosts, overdrives, distortions, fuzz pedals and wah effects. The series effects loop gives delay, reverb and modulation pedals a dedicated position after the amplifier’s preamp section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a Lower-Powered Valve Amplifier Head?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA lower-powered valve head offers the tonal character and response of a traditional valve amplifier in a more manageable format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwenty watts of valve power can provide substantial volume through an efficient guitar cabinet, making the Origin20H capable of handling rehearsals, recording sessions and many live performances. Its reduced-power settings then extend its usefulness into quieter playing environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe separate head format also gives players control over their speaker configuration. The amplifier can be paired with a compact cabinet for portability or connected to a larger cabinet when greater projection and low-frequency response are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis flexibility makes the Origin20H a practical choice for players who need one core amplifier for home, studio, rehearsal and stage use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBlues and Classic-Rock Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H excels at warm clean tones, responsive edge-of-breakup sounds and vintage-inspired overdrive. Its open response makes it particularly effective for blues, classic rock and traditional British guitar styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedalboard Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers who rely on pedals will appreciate the amplifier’s dynamic single-channel foundation, generous tone controls and switchable series effects loop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGuitarists Who Use Their Instrument’s Volume Control\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H responds naturally when the guitar’s volume is reduced, allowing a driven amplifier sound to be cleaned up directly from the instrument.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHome and Studio Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe approximately 3-watt and 0.5-watt settings provide greater flexibility for recording and home practice than a fixed-output valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGigging Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt mode offers useful projection for rehearsals, small venues and microphone-assisted live performances when paired with a suitable speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlayers Exploring Their First Valve Head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts straightforward layout, power reduction and included footswitch make the Origin20H an accessible introduction to separate valve amplifier heads and speaker cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall Origin20H 20W valve amplifier head\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall PEDL-90016 two-way footswitch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable UK mains cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginal Marshall packaging\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA speaker cabinet and speaker cable are required for conventional amplified use and are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve guitar amplifier head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin20H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTechnology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMid-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 3W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 0.5W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Reduction System\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall Powerstem\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstrument Input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ¼-inch jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain with pull boost\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTone Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTilt, Bass, Middle and Treble\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaster Volume and Presence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront-Panel Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Tilt, Bass, Middle, Treble, Master, Presence and Output Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Amplifier Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x switchable series effects loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop Connections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e¼-inch Send and Return\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDI Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ¼-inch speaker-emulated output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 x ¼-inch jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Cabinet Connections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x 16Ω cabinet, 1 x 8Ω cabinet or 2 x 16Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch Connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x ¼-inch jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded Footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall PEDL-90016 two-way footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch Functions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain Boost and Effects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-In Effects\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack with classic Marshall styling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e520mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e225mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9.4kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDesigned and Engineered\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVietnam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Origin20H operates from UK mains power using the supplied detachable mains cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor conventional use, the amplifier must be connected to a correctly matched guitar speaker cabinet before it is powered on. Use the dedicated speaker output that corresponds to the impedance and number of connected cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA proper speaker cable must be used between the amplifier and cabinet. A screened instrument cable is not designed to carry a speaker-level signal and must not be used for this connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing a Speaker Cabinet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H can be connected in one of the following configurations:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 16Ω speaker cabinet connected to the dedicated 16Ω output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne 8Ω speaker cabinet connected to the designated 8Ω output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo 16Ω speaker cabinets connected to both 8Ω outputs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDifferent speakers will influence the final sound considerably.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA cabinet fitted with Greenback-style speakers can emphasise warm mids and vintage compression, while a Vintage 30-style cabinet may deliver greater upper-mid focus and projection. Larger cabinets can provide additional low-frequency depth, while a compact 1x12 cabinet offers easier transportation and a smaller footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison and Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall DSL20HR\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DSL20HR offers two channels, a broader range of gain and a more modern feature set. It is better suited to players who need clean and high-gain sounds from one amplifier without relying heavily on pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H offers a more open, vintage-inspired response and is particularly strong as a clean or edge-of-breakup pedal platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SV20H Studio Vintage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20H is based on the legendary 1959 Super Lead and uses a four-input, non-master-volume layout. It delivers a more authentic Plexi-style experience but requires greater volume to generate natural amplifier overdrive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H provides lower power settings, a master volume, gain boost and Tilt control at a more accessible price point.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SC20H Studio Classic\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SC20H is inspired by the JCM800 2203 and delivers tighter, more aggressive preamp overdrive. It is the stronger choice for hard rock, punk and traditional heavy metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H provides cleaner headroom, softer vintage-style breakup and greater compatibility with pedal-based rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall Origin50H\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin50H offers greater output, projection and clean headroom for louder stages and larger venues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H is smaller, lighter and easier to drive at moderate volume levels, making it more practical for home, studio and small-stage use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Marshall Origin20H suitable for home use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The approximately 3-watt and 0.5-watt Powerstem settings make it more adaptable for home use than a fixed 20-watt amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt remains a valve amplifier and can still produce significant volume, particularly through an efficient speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Origin20H have multiple channels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a single-channel amplifier designed to provide a wide range of sounds through its Gain, Master, Tilt, EQ and guitar-volume settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the Tilt control do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tilt control blends between warmer Normal-style and brighter High Treble-style input characteristics. It recreates the tonal concept of blending the inputs on traditional multi-input Marshall amplifiers through one control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is the gain boost activated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe boost can be activated by pulling the Gain control or by using the included two-way footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the second footswitch button control?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe second button activates or bypasses the series effects loop. The footswitch must be connected for the loop’s switching function to operate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the amplifier include reverb?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Reverb is not built in, but a reverb pedal can be connected through the effects loop or placed before the amplifier input.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for high-gain music?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Origin20H focuses on clean, crunch and vintage-inspired overdrive sounds. A boost, overdrive or distortion pedal can be used when heavier levels of gain are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use delay pedals with it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Delay, reverb and modulation pedals can be connected through the series effects loop, placing them after the amplifier’s preamp section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I connect headphones?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Origin20H does not have a dedicated headphone output. A compatible load box or specialist amplifier interface is required for private headphone use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a speaker cabinet included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Origin20H is an amplifier head and requires a separate compatible guitar speaker cabinet and speaker cable for conventional amplified use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use a standard guitar cable to connect the cabinet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A dedicated speaker cable must be used between the amplifier and speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Origin20H is an excellent choice for players seeking expressive British valve tone without the rigid volume demands of a traditional high-powered amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts three Powerstem settings, flexible Tilt control, footswitchable gain boost and switchable effects loop make it exceptionally adaptable, while the EL34 power section delivers the warmth, punch and response expected from a classic Marshall design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor blues, classic rock, indie, country, recording and pedalboard-based rigs, the Origin20H provides a highly capable valve platform at an accessible price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices across our extensive product range\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTrusted independent UK musical instrument retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading your current equipment? Fair Deal Music accepts guitars, amplifiers, effects, keyboards, drums, studio equipment and other musical instruments in part exchange.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team for a friendly, no-obligation valuation and put the value of your existing equipment towards your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":36503930896540,"sku":"ORI20H","price":399.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/20h.jpg?v=1602852555"},{"product_id":"orange-ppc212v-vertical-guitar-cabinet-b-stock","title":"Orange PPC212V Vertical 2x12 Guitar Cabinet – B-Stock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC212V Vertical Guitar Cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e delivers the scale and projection of a professional 2x12 in a lighter, space-efficient vertical format designed with working guitarists in mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLoaded with \u003cstrong\u003etwo 12-inch Celestion Neo Creamback speakers\u003c\/strong\u003e, the PPC212V combines a broad, articulate midrange with smooth highs and controlled low-end response. The neodymium speaker magnets significantly reduce weight compared with many conventional 2x12 cabinets, helping bring the complete cabinet down to just \u003cstrong\u003e19.95kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts \u003cstrong\u003eopen-back construction\u003c\/strong\u003e creates a wider, more spacious sound than a traditional sealed cabinet, while the vertical speaker arrangement places one speaker closer to ear level for improved monitoring on stage. With \u003cstrong\u003e120 watts of power handling at 16 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e, it pairs with a wide range of compatible Orange valve and solid-state amplifier heads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis individual cabinet is offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it an attractive option for players looking for professional Orange cabinet performance at an alternative to standard new-stock pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/fURjPvH6ZrE?si=wQaPMPh7aNOLVTga\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePPC212V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConfiguration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical 2x12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen back\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x 12\" Celestion Neo Creamback\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120W mono\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImpedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15mm birch plywood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19.95kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight vertical 2x12 with strong projection and open-back spread\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGigging, recording, rock, blues, alternative, indie and pedal-based rigs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eB-Stock Condition Report\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition Classification: B-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Orange PPC212V is being offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than standard new stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic blemish, packaging variation or other reason for the B-Stock classification has been supplied for this individual cabinet, so no condition details have been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo additional item-specific damage, faults, repairs or modifications have been supplied for the listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information about the cosmetic condition of this particular cabinet, our team can provide further guidance before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange PPC212V Vertical 2x12 Guitar Speaker Cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ Amplifier head not included\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ No Additional Accessories Included\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis cabinet is classified as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo individual cosmetic marks or damage have been supplied for this listing, so none have been assumed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eB-Stock speaker cabinets are checked by Fair Deal Music before leaving us to make sure they are operating correctly for their intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a cabinet such as the PPC212V, our assessment focuses on:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth speaker outputs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeaker operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInput connections\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCabinet integrity\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGeneral hardware condition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOverall functionality\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying from a specialist music retailer also means you have access to experienced advice on amplifier impedance, power handling, cabinet matching and complete guitar-rig setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose The Orange PPC212V?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwin Celestion Neo Creambacks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212V is loaded with \u003cstrong\u003etwo Celestion Neo Creamback 12-inch speakers\u003c\/strong\u003e. They provide the broad midrange and musical top end associated with Creamback-style speakers while using lightweight neodymium magnets to reduce overall cabinet weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eVertical 2x12 Layout\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePositioning the speakers vertically gives the PPC212V a relatively narrow floor footprint while lifting the upper speaker closer to the player's ears.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThat can make it easier to hear yourself on stage without simply turning the amplifier up louder.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOpen-Back Projection\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe open-back enclosure allows sound to radiate behind the cabinet as well as forward, creating a wider and more room-filling presentation than a tightly sealed cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLightweight Birch-Ply Construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange uses \u003cstrong\u003e15mm birch plywood\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than the heavier construction found in some of its traditional cabinets. Combined with the Neo Creamback speakers, this reduces the cabinet to a manageable \u003cstrong\u003e19.95kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e120-Watt Power Handling\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith \u003cstrong\u003e120 watts mono at 16 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e, the PPC212V can partner a wide range of compatible amplifier heads, from lower-powered Orange valve amps to considerably more powerful stage amplifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrange PPC212V Compared With Popular Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212V vs PPC212 Closed Back\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe traditional PPC212 uses a horizontal closed-back enclosure with Celestion Vintage 30 speakers and is substantially heavier. It is better suited to players prioritising tight low-end punch and classic closed-back projection. The PPC212V is the more portable option with a wider, airier open-back response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212V vs PPC212 Open Back\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth provide the wider projection associated with an open-back design, but the PPC212 Open Back uses Vintage 30 speakers in a conventional horizontal enclosure. The PPC212V uses lighter Neo Creambacks and a vertical configuration, making it particularly attractive for players concerned with transport weight and stage footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212V vs PPC112\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC112 is smaller and easier to carry, making it a strong choice for compact rigs. The PPC212V gives you twice the speaker area, greater stage spread and the fuller physical response of two 12-inch speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212V vs PPC412\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA PPC412 provides the unmistakable scale and movement of four 12-inch speakers but requires considerably more transport and stage space. The PPC212V is the practical choice for players who want a professional multi-speaker rig without committing to a full 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is The Orange PPC212V For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212V is particularly well suited to guitarists who want \u003cstrong\u003eproper 2x12 performance without the weight and floor space associated with a traditional large cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a strong choice for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegularly gigging guitarists\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers carrying their own equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange valve-head users\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRock and blues-rock musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndie and alternative players\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedalboard-based guitarists\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers who prefer open-back projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitarists downsizing from a 4x12\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMusicians upgrading from a single 1x12 cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for advice on matching your amplifier head to the right speaker cabinet and impedance? Our experienced team of musicians can help by phone, online or in-store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSuitable Genres And Uses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBlues and blues-rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The open-back construction and Neo Creambacks provide a spacious response well suited to expressive clean and overdriven tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eClassic rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The twin 12-inch format delivers enough scale for strong rhythm parts and lead sounds without requiring a 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIndie and alternative:\u003c\/strong\u003e Open-back projection works especially well with modulation, delay and ambient effects where a wider sound can enhance the overall texture.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHard rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 120-watt rating provides plenty of capacity for compatible higher-powered heads while the dual-speaker configuration produces strong stage projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStudio recording:\u003c\/strong\u003e Two full-size speakers and an open-back enclosure give engineers several microphone-placement possibilities for capturing contrasting cabinet sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eVertical vs Horizontal 2x12: Which Is Better?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA \u003cstrong\u003evertical 2x12 cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e offers several practical advantages on stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe narrower footprint can make it easier to position in smaller performance spaces, while the upper speaker sits closer to ear level. This can improve personal monitoring without requiring an angled stand or excessive amplifier volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA conventional horizontal 2x12 can provide a broader physical base beneath a larger amplifier head, but the PPC212V is especially useful for players prioritising portability, monitoring and efficient use of stage space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOpen Back vs Closed Back Guitar Cabinets\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn \u003cstrong\u003eopen-back cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e allows the rear of the speakers to contribute to the sound in the room. This generally creates greater spread and a more spacious presentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClosed-back cabinets tend to project more directly forward with tighter low frequencies, making them particularly popular for heavy rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212V's open-back construction makes it an excellent choice for players who value clarity, dimension and room-filling projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStory \u0026amp; Context\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePPC212V was Orange's first vertical 2x12 guitar cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e, expanding the company's long-established PPC speaker range with a design focused more heavily on portability and modern stage requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTraditional Orange cabinets have earned a reputation for substantial construction, but that strength also brings considerable weight. The PPC212V tackles that challenge with \u003cstrong\u003e15mm birch plywood and Celestion Neo Creamback speakers\u003c\/strong\u003e, both helping reduce the load without turning the cabinet into a lightweight practice enclosure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result keeps the visual character and professional intent of the PPC family while giving regularly gigging musicians a more manageable alternative to Orange's conventional horizontal 2x12 and 4x12 cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatibility \u0026amp; Recommended Pairings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange OR15\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA compatible \u003cstrong\u003eOR15\u003c\/strong\u003e and PPC212V make a strong compact valve rig, combining lower-powered Orange valve drive with the scale and projection of twin 12-inch speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange TH30H\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TH30H pairs naturally with a 16-ohm PPC212V and gives you Clean and Dirty channels plus switchable valve output through a lighter 2x12 cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Rockerverb\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers using compatible Rockerverb heads can benefit from the PPC212V's lower weight and open-back response when they do not require the tighter behaviour of a conventional closed-back cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Baby Series\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompatible Dual Baby, Tour Baby and Gain Baby heads can create particularly portable rigs with the PPC212V, combining lightweight amplification with a full two-speaker stage setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSecond Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212V includes \u003cstrong\u003etwo parallel ¼-inch connections\u003c\/strong\u003e, allowing another compatible 16-ohm cabinet to be linked when the amplifier supports the resulting 8-ohm total load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOrange PPC212V\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuitar speaker cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConfiguration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical 2x12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStraight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen back\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x 12\" Celestion Neo Creamback\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120W mono\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImpedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15mm birch plywood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConnections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x parallel ¼\" jacks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrille\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHard-wearing woven paper grille cloth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkid runners\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e54.5 x 70 x 30cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19.95kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecification Note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact production date, serial number and specific reason for this cabinet's B-Stock classification have not been supplied and have therefore not been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC212V is a passive guitar speaker cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e, so it requires \u003cstrong\u003eno mains power, batteries or external power supply\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt must be connected to a compatible guitar amplifier's speaker output using a dedicated \u003cstrong\u003espeaker cable\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet has:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e16Ω impedance\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e120W mono power handling\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways check your amplifier's speaker-output impedance and power specification before connecting the cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use a standard guitar instrument lead between an amplifier head and speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC212V\u003c\/strong\u003e is one of the most practical cabinets in the PPC range for players who regularly move their own equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou still get a genuine twin-12-inch setup and proper birch-ply construction, but the Neo Creambacks and lighter cabinet design bring the total weight down to just under 20kg — considerably easier to manage than many traditional premium 2x12 cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe vertical arrangement and open-back construction also make it more than simply a lighter PPC212. It has its own practical stage advantages and a wider, more spacious response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBest suited for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Gigging guitarists wanting professional 2x12 performance with reduced weight and a smaller stage footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain benefit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Twin-speaker projection without the excessive weight of many conventional 2x12 cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue proposition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Premium Celestion Neo Creambacks and birch-ply construction in a practical touring-oriented format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout feature:\u003c\/strong\u003e The vertical twin Neo Creamback layout provides improved monitoring while keeping overall cabinet weight below 20kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers usually upgrade from:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1x12 cabinets when they want greater speaker area and projection without moving to a heavyweight traditional 2x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMost commonly paired with:\u003c\/strong\u003e Compatible Orange valve or solid-state amplifier heads and a quality speaker cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Don't position a vertical cabinet purely based on where it looks best. Take advantage of the raised upper speaker by placing the PPC212V where you can hear it clearly on stage before increasing amplifier volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShowroom feedback:\u003c\/strong\u003e The PPC212V makes particular sense for working musicians who love the sound and build of a proper 2x12 but are increasingly unwilling to carry unnecessarily heavy cabinets to every rehearsal and gig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you buy from Fair Deal Music, you're choosing one of the UK's most established, independent family run music retailers since 1987.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Birmingham showroom has helped generations of musicians find the right guitars, amplifiers and equipment, backed by a knowledgeable musician-led team who understand the products we sell.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned, B-Stock and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure online ordering\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA large Birmingham showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecades of experience with both new and pre-owned musical equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you're matching a new amplifier head to the right cabinet, moving from a 1x12 to a larger setup or looking for a lighter alternative to a conventional 2x12, we're happy to help you make the right choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to upgrade your guitar, bass, keyboard, amplifier, drum kit or studio gear, your existing equipment could help reduce the cost of your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply get in touch with our team for a no-obligation valuation, and we'll be happy to discuss the options available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's an easy way to unlock the value of the gear you no longer use while making your next piece of equipment even more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange PPC212V open back or closed back?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212V uses an \u003cstrong\u003eopen-back design\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving it a wider and more spacious projection than Orange's traditional closed-back PPC212.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat speakers are fitted to the PPC212V?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt contains \u003cstrong\u003etwo 12-inch Celestion Neo Creamback speakers\u003c\/strong\u003e. Their neodymium magnets help reduce cabinet weight while retaining the performance expected from a professional guitar speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat impedance is the PPC212V?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is rated at \u003cstrong\u003e16 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYour amplifier must provide a speaker output compatible with a 16-ohm cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much power can the PPC212V handle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is rated at \u003cstrong\u003e120 watts mono\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy is the PPC212V lighter than many other Orange 2x12 cabinets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt combines lighter \u003cstrong\u003e15mm birch-ply construction\u003c\/strong\u003e with Celestion Neo Creamback speakers, whose neodymium magnets weigh less than conventional ceramic speaker magnets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a vertical 2x12 good for gigs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The narrower footprint uses stage space efficiently, while the upper speaker sits closer to ear height and can make it easier for the guitarist to hear the cabinet clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I connect two PPC212V cabinets together?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo 16-ohm cabinets connected in parallel create an \u003cstrong\u003e8-ohm total load\u003c\/strong\u003e. This configuration should only be used with an amplifier designed to operate safely into 8 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the PPC212V suitable for high-gain guitar?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Neo Creambacks handle driven tones well, although the open-back construction gives the cabinet a wider and less tightly enclosed response than a conventional closed-back high-gain cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould I choose a PPC212V or PPC212 Closed Back?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003ePPC212V\u003c\/strong\u003e if reduced weight, open-back spread, vertical projection and stage portability are priorities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the conventional \u003cstrong\u003ePPC212 Closed Back\u003c\/strong\u003e if you specifically want tighter low-end response, Vintage 30 speakers and the feel of a substantial traditional sealed cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat cable should I use between the amplifier and PPC212V?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a dedicated \u003cstrong\u003espeaker cable\u003c\/strong\u003e rated for amplifier-to-cabinet connections. Never substitute a conventional screened guitar instrument cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal Buying Advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock Orange PPC212V Vertical Guitar Cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e is a particularly strong choice for players who want the physical scale and projection of two 12-inch speakers without carrying one of Orange's heavier traditional cabinet designs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts combination of \u003cstrong\u003etwo Celestion Neo Creambacks, 120-watt handling, 16-ohm impedance, open-back construction and lightweight 15mm birch-ply enclosure\u003c\/strong\u003e makes it ideal for working guitarists who regularly move between rehearsals, studios and live venues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd the smaller floor footprint and improved vertical monitoring and the PPC212V becomes much more than simply a lighter 2x12 — it is a genuinely practical modern alternative to the conventional horizontal cabinet format.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Orange","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":42632913453281,"sku":"PPC212-V-B","price":689.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/preview_4e717c7f-4f13-4cf5-bedc-f53a5c97c3b3.jpg?v=1668693386"},{"product_id":"marshall-1974cxd3-handwired-1x12-cabinet-red-cream","title":"Marshall 1974CXD3 Handwired 1x12\" Cabinet, Red \u0026 Cream","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall 1974CXD3 Handwired Cabinet is a beautifully styled 20-watt 1x12 extension cabinet designed to recreate the warmth, compression and expressive response of Marshall’s celebrated late-1960s amplification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLoaded with a specially voiced Celestion G12M-20 Greenback speaker, it delivers rich midrange, rounded bass and a smooth upper-frequency response that works exceptionally well for blues, classic rock and vintage-inspired overdrive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is the natural extension partner for the Marshall 1974X Handwired combo, increasing projection and speaker area while retaining the responsive character of the original setup. Its fixed 16-ohm impedance also makes it suitable for other compatible guitar amplifiers with an appropriate speaker output and safe power rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFinished in an eye-catching Red \u0026amp; Cream colour scheme, the 1974CXD3 combines authentic vintage presentation with a compact cabinet format suitable for recording, rehearsals and live performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1974CXD3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandwired\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassive guitar speaker cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand New\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed \u0026amp; Cream\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Format\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x12 extension cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCelestion G12M-20 Greenback\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1\/4-inch speaker input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntended Pairing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall 1974X Handwired Combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAuthentic 1960s-inspired Greenback tone in a compact cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlues, classic rock, vintage rock, recording and lower-powered valve amplifiers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall 1974CXD3 Handwired 1x12 speaker cabinet in Red \u0026amp; Cream\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall 1974CXD3?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAuthentic Handwired-Series Design\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CX belongs to Marshall’s prestigious Handwired range, which is inspired by the construction, materials and attention to detail associated with the company’s classic amplifiers from the 1960s.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts design is based on cabinets produced alongside the original Marshall 1974 amplifiers between 1966 and 1968.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result is a compact extension cabinet created for players who value:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTraditional British guitar tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eResponsive speaker dynamics\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVintage-inspired construction\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStraightforward passive operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAuthentic Marshall presentation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA direct connection between amplifier and speaker\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCelestion G12M-20 Greenback Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the heart of the cabinet is a 12-inch Celestion G12M-20 Greenback rated at 20 watts and 16 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Greenback is closely associated with formative British blues and rock guitar sounds. Its response is known for combining warm low frequencies with an expressive midrange and a smooth, musical top end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe G12M-20 provides:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarm and rounded bass\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRich lower-midrange body\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpressive upper-midrange projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmooth high frequencies\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNatural speaker compression\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eResponsive pick attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetailed vintage-style overdrive\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs the connected amplifier is driven, the speaker adds its own harmonic texture and compression, helping create the lively response associated with classic low-powered Marshall rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned to Complement the Marshall 1974X\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 is the matching extension cabinet for the Marshall 1974X Handwired combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConnecting the additional cabinet increases the total speaker area and changes how the completed amplifier system projects sound into the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe pairing can provide:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreater sound dispersion\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA broader stage sound\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional physical response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eImproved monitoring for the player\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore flexible microphone placement\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe appearance of a coordinated vintage Marshall rig\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe matching cabinet dimensions also allow the 1974X combo to sit neatly above the extension cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRich Vintage British Midrange\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 is designed for players who want a full and harmonically detailed midrange rather than an extremely scooped or clinical speaker response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes it particularly effective for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues phrasing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOpen chords\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClassic-rock rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDynamic lead guitar\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEdge-of-breakup amplifier tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower-gain overdrive\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFuzz and treble-booster pedals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe guitar remains present in a band mix without relying on excessive treble or volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eNatural Speaker Compression\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe relatively low 20-watt power rating allows the G12M-20 to respond dynamically when paired with an appropriately powered amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt lower levels, it remains articulate and detailed. As the signal becomes stronger, the speaker introduces natural compression and harmonic colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis creates a playing response that can feel softer and more forgiving than a high-powered speaker designed to remain completely clean.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact 1x12 Format\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single-speaker enclosure provides a practical alternative to larger 2x12 and 4x12 cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts compact design is easier to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTransport between rehearsals and performances\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosition in a recording studio\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore at home\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFit onto smaller stages\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarry through narrow venues\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePair with compact amplifier heads and combos\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDespite its manageable dimensions, the cabinet retains the depth and projection of a full-sized 12-inch guitar speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDistinctive Red \u0026amp; Cream Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 uses a striking Red \u0026amp; Cream colour scheme that gives the cabinet a distinctive vintage presentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe contrasting finish complements the traditional Marshall construction while offering a more individual appearance than a standard black cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is an excellent choice for players who want their amplifier setup to stand out in:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudios\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShowrooms\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLive performances\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCollection displays\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePromotional photography\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVideo content\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStraightforward 16-Ohm Operation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet presents a fixed 16-ohm mono load through a single 1\/4-inch input.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes connection simple, provided the amplifier offers a compatible 16-ohm speaker output and has a suitable power rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are no stereo switches, impedance selectors or additional controls to configure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMade in the United Kingdom\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CX is made in the United Kingdom as part of Marshall’s Handwired range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is intended to reflect the visual design, compact proportions and speaker character associated with the company’s late-1960s amplification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a 1x12 Extension Cabinet?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 1x12 speaker cabinet offers an effective balance of tonal depth, portability and simplicity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompared with a smaller speaker enclosure, a 12-inch guitar speaker generally provides:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreater low-frequency body\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFuller chord reproduction\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore convincing overdrive tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eImproved stage projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA more physical playing response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompared with a 2x12 or 4x12 cabinet, a 1x12 is typically:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEasier to carry\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimpler to store\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore practical for smaller venues\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBetter suited to compact studios\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEasier to position for recording\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLess visually imposing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 is particularly suited to lower-powered valve amplifiers where speaker character and natural compression are central to the sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 1974X Owners\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 is designed as the matching extension cabinet for the 1974X Handwired combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt expands the rig while preserving its established Greenback speaker character and vintage visual presentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBlues Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe warm midrange, smooth top end and responsive compression complement dynamic blues phrasing and edge-of-breakup amplifier sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic-Rock Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Celestion Greenback voice is ideally suited to crunchy rhythm guitar, open chords and harmonically rich lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe compact enclosure is easy to position and microphone in a studio.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts expressive midrange can help guitar tracks sit naturally in a recording without requiring excessive equalisation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlayers Using Lower-Powered Valve Amplifiers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is a strong choice for compatible amplifiers rated within its safe power-handling limit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt allows the speaker to respond dynamically without requiring the extreme volume of a high-powered stage rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe G12M-20 works particularly well with:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble boosters\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVintage-style fuzz\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow-gain overdrive\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTransparent boosts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTape-style delay\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAnalogue modulation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpring-reverb pedals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCollectors of British Amplification\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Handwired-series construction, vintage-inspired design and distinctive Red \u0026amp; Cream finish make this cabinet appealing to Marshall enthusiasts and collectors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderstanding the Celestion Greenback Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClean Sounds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt cleaner amplifier settings, the G12M-20 provides warm body, clear note separation and a smooth top end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is particularly effective for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChord work\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues rhythm\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFingerstyle electric guitar\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean arpeggios\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower-output pickups\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eEdge-of-Breakup Tones\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs the amplifier begins to overdrive, the speaker introduces harmonic detail and gentle compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis produces a responsive sound that changes naturally with picking strength and guitar-volume adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic-Rock Crunch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDriven rhythm tones gain thickness and midrange authority without losing the definition of individual notes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePower chords sound broad and energetic, while open chords retain harmonic complexity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLead Tones\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Greenback’s projecting midrange helps single-note lines remain audible in a band mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts smooth upper frequencies can also prevent sustained lead tones from becoming excessively sharp or brittle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFuzz and Boost Pedals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVintage-style fuzz and booster pedals interact naturally with the speaker’s warm response and controlled treble.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet can help soften aggressive pedal harmonics while preserving the expressive character of the effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1974CXD3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBase Cabinet Model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1974CX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandwired\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassive guitar extension cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed \u0026amp; Cream\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCelestion G12M-20 Greenback\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 inches\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Power Rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTotal Cabinet Power Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms mono\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1\/4-inch speaker input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e535mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 14kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eConnection Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall 1974CXD3 must be connected to a compatible guitar amplifier using a dedicated speaker cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore connecting the cabinet, confirm that:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier supports a 16-ohm speaker load\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier output is appropriate for a 20-watt cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA proper unshielded speaker cable is being used\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier is switched off before connections are made\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth cable plugs are inserted fully\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA standard screened guitar cable must not be used between an amplifier and speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is passive and cannot amplify a guitar independently. A guitar connects to an amplifier, and the amplifier then powers the speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAmplifier Compatibility\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 is designed to pair with the Marshall 1974X but can also be used with other compatible guitar amplifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe connected amplifier must:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOffer a 16-ohm speaker output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHave a safe output rating for the cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBe connected with a suitable speaker cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBe operated according to the amplifier manufacturer’s instructions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpecial care is required with amplifiers rated above 20 watts. Excessive amplifier output can damage the speaker even when the amplifier is not set to maximum volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eRecommended Pairings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 1974X Handwired Combo\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe intended pairing creates a coordinated Handwired rig with two Celestion G12M-20 Greenback speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the natural choice for players seeking authentic late-1960s-inspired Marshall tone and presentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompatible Low-Wattage Valve Head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable valve head with a 16-ohm output and safe power rating can turn the 1974CXD3 into a compact recording, rehearsal or performance cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eVintage-Voiced Amplifiers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet works particularly well with amplifiers designed around blues, classic-rock and lower-gain British tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAttenuated Amplifier Setups\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA compatible amplifier and properly rated attenuator can be used where additional output management is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe impedance and power ratings of every component must be matched correctly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e1974CXD3 Compared with Other Cabinet Formats\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 1974CXD3 1x12\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 focuses on warm, expressive Greenback tone and compact portability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts 20-watt power rating makes it especially suitable for the matching 1974X and other compatible lower-powered amplifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall Studio-Series 1x12\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall’s Studio cabinets typically offer higher power handling and are designed to complement modern 20-watt Studio amplifier heads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CX provides a more historically inspired design and lower-powered Greenback response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 2x12 Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 2x12 provides broader sound dispersion, greater power handling and a larger physical response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 is lighter, narrower and easier to position in smaller rooms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 4x12 Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 4x12 delivers maximum projection, speaker area and traditional stage presence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1974CXD3 is considerably easier to transport and better suited to compact recording and performance environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Marshall 1974CXD3 an active cabinet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a passive speaker cabinet and requires a compatible guitar amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich speaker is fitted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet contains one 12-inch Celestion G12M-20 Greenback speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cabinet’s power handling?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe total power handling is 20 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat impedance does it require?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet presents a fixed 16-ohm mono load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it designed for the Marshall 1974X?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is the matching extension cabinet for the Marshall 1974X Handwired combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with another amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the amplifier has a compatible 16-ohm output and a safe output rating for the cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a 50W or 100W amplifier be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is rated at only 20 watts. Connecting a substantially more powerful amplifier creates a serious risk of speaker damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA lower-powered compatible amplifier is strongly recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I plug a guitar directly into the cabinet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The guitar must connect to an amplifier, which then powers the speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a regular guitar cable be used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A dedicated speaker cable must be used between the amplifier and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the cabinet mono or stereo?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a mono cabinet with one input and a fixed 16-ohm impedance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the 1974CXD3 made in the UK?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is made in the United Kingdom as part of Marshall’s Handwired range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat makes the D3 version different?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe D3 designation identifies this Red \u0026amp; Cream cosmetic version of the 1974CX. Its core speaker configuration, impedance and power handling remain based on the established 1974CX design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a speaker cable included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA speaker cable is available separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall 1974CXD3 is a beautifully executed extension cabinet for players seeking warm, expressive and authentically vintage British guitar tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts Celestion G12M-20 Greenback provides the rich midrange, smooth top end and natural compression that suit blues, classic rock and dynamic lower-gain playing particularly well. The compact 1x12 enclosure is easier to transport and position than a larger cabinet, yet still provides the body and projection of a full-sized 12-inch speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs the matching extension cabinet for the 1974X Handwired combo, it creates a coordinated and highly responsive two-speaker rig. The striking Red \u0026amp; Cream finish also gives this edition a distinctive appearance that stands apart from standard black Marshall cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 1974X owners, recording guitarists and players using compatible lower-powered valve amplifiers, this is an exceptional vintage-inspired cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing Fair Deal Music means buying from a passionate team of musicians who genuinely understand the products we sell. Whether you’re purchasing your first instrument, upgrading your current setup or searching for something special, we’re here to help you make the right choice with friendly advice and expert support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trusted independent UK music retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think. We’re always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you’re looking to trade a guitar, amplifier, keyboard, drum kit, pedal or studio equipment, our team can provide a fair, no-obligation valuation and help make your next upgrade more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team or visit the Fair Deal Music Birmingham showroom to discuss your equipment and discover how much you could save.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43836562669793,"sku":"1974CXD3","price":379.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/M2010.708_1974CXD3_Front.png?v=1680696865"},{"product_id":"marshall-sv20c-studio-vintage-20w-1x10-combo-valve-amp-bright-blue","title":"Marshall Design Store SV20C Studio Vintage 20W 1x10 Combo Valve Amp, Bright Blue","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Design Store SV20C Studio Vintage brings the legendary tone and dynamic response of the 1959SLP Super Lead into a compact, British-made 20-watt valve combo, finished in an eye-catching Bright Blue covering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts traditional four-input layout provides High Treble and Normal voices that can be used separately or bridged together with a patch cable. This lets you blend cutting Plexi-style attack with fuller, rounder body to create everything from warm blues breakup to aggressive classic-rock crunch and singing lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwitchable 20-watt and 5-watt output modes make the SV20C more manageable than a full-sized 100-watt Super Lead, while the built-in 10-inch Celestion V-Type speaker delivers clear attack, warm midrange and articulate vintage-inspired character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA rear effects loop, DI output and flexible external-speaker connections add modern practicality without compromising the amplifier’s straightforward, player-responsive design. Finished in exclusive-looking Bright Blue Design Store styling, this is a distinctive alternative to the standard black Studio Vintage combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/5I10kQUCbi8?si=vATncnOEweOWOVdk\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSV20C Studio Vintage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall Design Store\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBright Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve guitar combo amplifier\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand New\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Inspiration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall 1959SLP Super Lead\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Mode\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Voices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh Treble and Normal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFour high- and low-sensitivity inputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Bridging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, using a suitable patch cable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 10-inch Celestion V-Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and Return\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDI Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-In Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAuthentic Plexi-inspired response in a compact Design Store combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlues rock, classic rock, hard rock, recording and live performance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall Design Store SV20C Studio Vintage combo amplifier in Bright Blue\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable mains power cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall Design Store SV20C?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLegendary 1959SLP-Inspired Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C takes its inspiration from the Marshall 1959SLP Super Lead, one of the most influential electric guitar amplifiers ever produced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe original Super Lead became famous for its:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePowerful British midrange\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClear and immediate pick attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOpen dynamic response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRich harmonic overdrive\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrong chord definition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInteraction with guitar volume controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnmistakable classic-rock character\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Vintage recreates this fundamental response at a reduced 20-watt output, making the experience accessible without requiring a full-sized 100-watt head and 4x12 cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDistinctive Bright Blue Design Store Finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Design Store edition replaces the traditional black exterior with a striking Bright Blue covering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bold finish gives the amplifier a unique visual identity while retaining the familiar Marshall gold control panel, script logo and vintage-inspired cabinet design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is an excellent choice for guitarists who want authentic Studio Vintage performance with a more individual stage or studio appearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHigh Treble and Normal Voices\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C provides two differently voiced signal paths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eHigh Treble\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe High Treble voice delivers the brighter and more cutting side of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt emphasises:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUpper-midrange presence\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChord definition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBright classic-rock crunch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting lead tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eArticulation with humbucking pickups\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe High Treble inputs are ideal when the guitar or connected speaker has a naturally warm or dark response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eNormal\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Normal voice provides a rounder and fuller tonal balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt adds:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow-mid body\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA smoother upper-frequency response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFuller rhythm tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarm blues breakup\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional weight for single-coil pickups\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA less aggressive overall attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Normal inputs are useful when the High Treble voice sounds too sharp or when a thicker foundation is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBridgeable Channel Design\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA short instrument patch cable can be used to bridge the High Treble and Normal voices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis traditional Marshall technique allows the two Loudness controls to be blended, giving you far more tonal flexibility than a conventional single-input amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing High Treble adds definition and cutting attack, while increasing Normal introduces additional body and warmth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlending the two can produce:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBalanced classic-rock crunch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFull rhythm tones with clear attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarm but articulate blues sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThicker humbucker lead tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSingle-coil sounds with additional body\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA carefully controlled balance between brightness and bass\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSwitchable 20W and 5W Output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C can operate at either 20 watts or 5 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e20-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full-power setting provides the greatest:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean headroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow-frequency authority\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDynamic range\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRehearsal volume\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStage projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eResponse through external cabinets\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is ideal for band rehearsals, live performances and recording sessions where the amplifier can be played at a healthy level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e5-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe reduced-power setting makes the amplifier easier to control in smaller rooms and studio environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt allows the Loudness controls to be increased at a lower overall level, helping you access the amplifier’s natural crunch and harmonic compression more easily.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive valve watts can still be extremely loud through an efficient guitar speaker, so the reduced setting should not be considered silent or bedroom-only operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eEL34 Valve Power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C uses two EL34 power valves to create its recognisable British response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEL34 valves contribute to the amplifier’s:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePronounced midrange\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFirm but musical bass\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClear upper-frequency attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHarmonic complexity\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNatural compression\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDynamic response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClassic Marshall overdrive\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier reacts clearly to changes in picking strength. Playing gently can produce a cleaner response, while harder picking introduces more compression, drive and harmonic detail.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExceptional Guitar-Volume Interaction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Vintage is especially rewarding for players who control their sound directly from the guitar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith the amplifier set into overdrive, reducing the guitar’s volume can create:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCleaner rhythm tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReduced gain without losing clarity\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSofter blues sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreater dynamic range\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSeveral usable tones without channel switching\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTurning the guitar volume back up restores the amplifier’s full crunch, sustain and attack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis interactive response is one of the defining characteristics of a traditional Plexi-style amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCelestion V-Type Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C contains one 10-inch Celestion V-Type speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts balanced response complements the Studio Vintage circuit by providing:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClear pick attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWarm midrange\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDefined clean tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRich overdrive texture\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControlled bass\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmooth but articulate upper frequencies\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 10-inch format helps keep the combo compact and responsive while retaining enough body for recording, rehearsals and live performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTraditional Three-Band EQ\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass controls shape the main tonal response of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eTreble\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdjusts upper-frequency clarity and attack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing Treble creates a brighter and more immediate sound, while reducing it softens sharper pickups or speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eMiddle\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls the central body and projection of the guitar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher Middle settings create a fuller, more prominent sound that works particularly well for lead playing and classic-rock rhythm tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eBass\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdjusts low-frequency weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing Bass adds fullness, while reducing it can tighten the response when the amplifier is heavily driven or positioned close to a wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePresence Control\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePresence shapes the upper-frequency character of the power-amplifier section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing Presence adds:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional bite\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFaster perceived attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreater projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore clarity in a band mix\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA livelier response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReducing Presence produces a smoother and less aggressive sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePresence works alongside the Treble control but affects a different part of the amplifier circuit, allowing the final response to be balanced more precisely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear-panel effects loop allows compatible pedals and processors to be positioned after the amplifier’s main gain stages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is particularly useful for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChorus\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePhaser\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlanger\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTremolo\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMulti-effects processors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing time-based effects in the loop can help repeats and ambience remain clearer when the amplifier is producing natural overdrive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoosts, overdrives, fuzz pedals, compressors and wah effects will normally be connected before the amplifier’s front input.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDI Output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DI output provides an additional signal connection for compatible recording and live equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful when:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecording ideas at home\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSending an additional signal to an audio interface\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConnecting to compatible live-sound equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCombining direct and microphone signals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilding more advanced amplifier rigs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must still be connected to a suitable speaker load whenever it is powered on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExternal Speaker Flexibility\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C provides multiple rear-panel speaker outputs for compatible 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the internal 10-inch speaker to be supplemented or the amplifier to be used with a larger cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn external cabinet can provide:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreater sound dispersion\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional bass response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreased stage projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA different speaker character\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe physical feel of a larger Marshall rig\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt in Bletchley, England\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts construction combines traditional amplifier design with carefully selected modern production methods to reproduce the response of the original Super Lead in a smaller format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a Plexi-Style Valve Combo?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA Plexi-style amplifier is valued for openness, dynamics and natural interaction with the player.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRather than relying on multiple channels, digital processing or large amounts of preamp compression, the Studio Vintage encourages you to shape the sound through:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePicking strength\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitar-volume settings\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePickup selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh Treble and Normal blending\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExternal boost and overdrive pedals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeaker choice\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAmplifier output level\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis creates a direct and highly expressive playing experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo format also places the amplifier and speaker inside one portable enclosure, removing the need to transport a separate head and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBlues and Blues-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Loudness settings provide articulate cleans and warm edge-of-breakup tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing the controls creates expressive overdrive that reacts naturally to picking strength and guitar-volume changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic-Rock Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bridgeable voices, EL34 power section and responsive midrange deliver the crunch and harmonic richness associated with classic British rock amplification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHard-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing the Loudness controls or adding a boost pedal creates powerful rhythm crunch and sustaining lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier retains strong note separation even when driven.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe compact dimensions, 5-watt setting, DI output and effects loop make the SV20C highly useful in a recording environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts dynamic response also allows several tones to be captured by changing the guitar controls rather than resetting the entire amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGigging Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 20-watt output provides useful stage and rehearsal volume, particularly when the amplifier is miked through a venue PA.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn external cabinet can be added when greater projection or sound dispersion is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Vintage works especially well with:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean boosts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble boosters\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow-gain overdrives\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFuzz pedals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWah effects\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompressors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay, reverb and modulation can be positioned in the effects loop when greater clarity is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlayers Seeking a Distinctive Marshall\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bright Blue Design Store finish makes this version particularly attractive to musicians who want their amplifier to stand apart visually from standard black stage equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderstanding the Studio Vintage Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClean and Articulate\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a lower Loudness setting and select a low-sensitivity input.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet Treble, Middle, Bass and Presence near their central positions before adjusting them for the guitar and room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis produces an articulate sound with enough clarity for chords, arpeggios and external effects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWarm Blues Breakup\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the Normal voice and gradually increase its Loudness control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sound will begin to compress and overdrive as the amplifier is pushed, producing a fuller and smoother response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBright Classic-Rock Crunch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the High Treble voice and increase Loudness I.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis creates a cutting rhythm sound with strong pick attack and prominent upper midrange.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBalanced Bridged Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBridge the two voices and blend Loudness I and Loudness II.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse High Treble for attack and Normal for body, adjusting each until chords sound full but clearly defined.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSaturated Lead Sound\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncrease the relevant Loudness controls and add a compatible boost or overdrive pedal when additional sustain is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRaise Middle and Presence carefully to help the lead sound project through a band mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGuitar-Volume Clean-Up\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet the amplifier for overdrive and reduce the guitar volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe gain level decreases while much of the fundamental tonal character remains, allowing cleaner rhythm and driven lead sounds to be accessed without touching the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSV20C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStudio Vintage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEdition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall Design Store\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBright Blue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve guitar combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Inspiration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1959SLP Super Lead\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Voices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh Treble and Normal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstrument Inputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFour 1\/4-inch jack inputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInput Configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh and low sensitivity for each voice\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoudness I and Loudness II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEqualisation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower-Amp Tone Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePresence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter Valve\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x10-inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCelestion V-Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and Return\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDI Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-In Effects\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-In Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaster Volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFive 1\/4-inch jack sockets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupported Speaker Loads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω, 8Ω and 4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 500mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 460mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 245mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 15.85kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower and Speaker Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SV20C operates from mains electricity and includes a detachable power cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe internal speaker must be connected correctly whenever the amplifier is powered on. A suitable external cabinet or professional load device can be used instead when connected according to the amplifier’s specifications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproved speaker arrangements include compatible:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCabinet Arrangement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRequired Amplifier Output\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 16Ω speaker or cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x16Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 8Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x8Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 16Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x16Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 4Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x4Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 8Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x8Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a dedicated speaker cable for an external cabinet connection. A standard screened guitar cable is not suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eRecommended Pedal Connections\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA useful signal-chain starting point is:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGuitar → Tuner → Compressor → Wah → Boost\/Overdrive\/Fuzz → SV20C Input\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompatible time-based and modulation effects can be placed in the rear effects loop:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEffects Send → Modulation → Delay → Reverb → Effects Return\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis arrangement lets drive pedals interact directly with the amplifier input while keeping delay repeats and ambience clearer after the main overdrive stages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison With Other Marshall Studio Combos\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SV20C Studio Vintage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C offers the open dynamics, bridgeable voices and bright attack associated with the 1959SLP Super Lead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the strongest choice for players seeking traditional Plexi-style cleans, crunch and guitar-volume interaction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SC20C Studio Classic\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SC20C is inspired by the JCM800 2203 and includes Pre-Amp and Master Volume controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides a tighter, more aggressive response and makes preamp overdrive easier to achieve at controlled output levels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall ST20C Studio JTM\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ST20C offers a softer attack, fuller low end and earlier vintage-style breakup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is suited to players seeking warm blues, roots and early British amplifier tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SN20C Studio 900\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C provides two channels, independent channel volumes, built-in reverb and more readily available lead gain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is better suited to players who need footswitchable clean and distorted sounds, while the SV20C focuses on simplicity and dynamic response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall DSL20CR\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DSL20CR offers modern channel switching and a broader high-gain range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C is aimed at players who prefer a more traditional signal path and classic Super Lead-inspired character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Marshall SV20C an all-valve amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It uses ECC83 valves in the preamp and phase-splitter stages with two EL34 power valves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have two channels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides High Treble and Normal voices, each with high- and low-sensitivity inputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe voices can be used separately or bridged together with a suitable patch cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the SV20C have a master-volume control?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Loudness I and Loudness II control the level entering the amplifier’s two voices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNatural overdrive increases as these controls are raised.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the two voices be blended?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A short patch cable can be used to bridge the High Treble and Normal inputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two Loudness controls can then be adjusted to balance brightness and body.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have built-in reverb?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Reverb can be added using a compatible pedal through the front input or effects loop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have an effects loop?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Rear-panel Send and Return connections are provided for compatible pedals and processors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an external cabinet be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The amplifier supports approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm speaker configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs 5-watt mode quiet enough for home use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-watt setting substantially reduces the output, but five valve watts can still produce considerable volume through an efficient speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA compatible attenuator or reactive-load solution may provide additional control where very low levels are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for live performances?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The 20-watt output is suitable for rehearsals and many live situations, particularly when the amplifier is miked through a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the DI output allow completely silent operation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must remain connected to a suitable speaker load or correctly rated professional load device whenever it is powered on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the power valves require manual biasing after replacement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20C uses a cathode-biased output stage, so manual bias adjustment is not required when replacing the power valves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eValve replacement should still be carried out by a suitably qualified amplifier technician.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Bright Blue version technically different from the standard SV20C?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bright Blue Design Store model retains the established SV20C circuit, controls, valve configuration, speaker and connections. Its primary distinction is the customised exterior finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall Design Store SV20C is an exceptional choice for guitarists seeking authentic Plexi-inspired tone in a practical British-made combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts High Treble and Normal voices provide far more flexibility than the simple control panel initially suggests, especially when bridged and blended together. The EL34 power section delivers the open dynamics, harmonic richness and responsive guitar-volume interaction expected from a classic Marshall design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwitchable 20-watt and 5-watt operation, a Celestion V-Type speaker, effects loop, DI output and external-cabinet connectivity make it equally capable in the studio, rehearsal room and on stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe striking Bright Blue finish gives this edition an unmistakable visual identity, making it particularly appealing to players who want classic Marshall performance without the standard black appearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing Fair Deal Music means buying from a passionate team of musicians who genuinely understand the products we sell. Whether you’re purchasing your first instrument, upgrading your current setup or searching for something special, we’re here to help you make the right choice with friendly advice and expert support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trusted independent UK music retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think. We’re always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you’re looking to trade a guitar, amplifier, keyboard, drum kit, pedal or studio equipment, our team can provide a fair, no-obligation valuation and help make your next upgrade more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team or visit the Fair Deal Music Birmingham showroom to discuss your equipment and discover how much you could save.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":53607722418556,"sku":"SV20CD37","price":659.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/IMG_5975.jpg?v=1730473669"},{"product_id":"marshall-jcm900-4100-valve-guitar-amp-head-open-box","title":"Marshall JCM900 4100 Valve Guitar Amp Head [OPEN-BOX]","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall JCM900 4100 Dual Reverb is a powerful, British-made 100-watt valve amplifier head created for players who need authoritative stage volume, articulate cleans and aggressive high-gain Marshall tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOriginally introduced in 1990 as an evolution of the JCM800 generation, the 4100 adds a second channel, independent channel volumes, separate spring-reverb controls and a broader range of onboard gain. Channel A covers articulate cleans, responsive breakup and driven rhythm tones, while Channel B provides the additional saturation, compression and sustain required for hard rock, punk, alternative music and lead playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA switchable 100W\/50W output setting offers greater control for different environments, while the adjustable effects loop supports floor pedals and compatible rack equipment. Built at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England, the JCM900 4100 remains a formidable professional amplifier for touring, recording and full-volume live performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Open Box example has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team and offers the complete performance of the JCM900 4100 at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/CajXa89rl34?si=EcSfvFQv93oA4ang\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJCM900 4100 Dual Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVintage Reissue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve guitar amplifier head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen Box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Setting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean, breakup and driven rhythm tones\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLead and higher-gain distortion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpring reverb with independent channel controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, with level control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFour 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSelectable 16Ω, 8Ω or 4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull-sized JCM900 power with dual-channel versatility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, hard rock, punk, grunge, alternative music and professional live use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall JCM900 4100?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eA Defining Marshall Sound of the 1990s\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900 4100 was originally released in January 1990, building on the established Marshall Master Volume formula with increased gain, reduced noise and two-channel flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts direct attack, controlled low end and assertive upper midrange became a major part of rock, alternative, punk and heavier guitar sounds throughout the decade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Vintage Reissue retains the established control layout, gain structure and visual identity of the original amplifier while being manufactured at Marshall’s UK factory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo Distinct Channels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4100 provides two channels with independent Gain, Volume and Reverb controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows two complete sounds to be prepared, balanced and selected remotely using the supplied footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel A\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A covers the amplifier’s cleaner and lower-gain range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Gain settings deliver bright and articulate clean tones with the headroom expected from a 100-watt amplifier. Increasing the control introduces progressively more warmth, compression and British-style breakup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A is particularly effective for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePowerful clean rhythm tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues and blues rock\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndie and alternative guitar\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk rhythm sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClassic-rock crunch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedal-based rigs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEdge-of-breakup playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel B\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B provides the amplifier’s dedicated Lead Gain control and higher-gain voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower settings deliver muscular rock crunch, while higher settings introduce additional saturation, compression and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B is well suited to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHard-rock rhythm guitar\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk and grunge\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeavy alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAggressive power chords\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSustaining lead tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh-output humbuckers\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLayered distorted guitar parts\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIndependent Channel Volumes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach channel has its own Volume control, allowing rhythm and lead levels to be balanced accurately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A can be configured for clean or crunchy rhythm playing, while Channel B can be set louder for solos. This produces a genuine level increase rather than simply adding more distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent volumes are also useful when changing between guitars with different pickup outputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDual Spring Reverb\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A and Channel B each have a dedicated Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows a restrained ambience to be prepared for clean or rhythm sounds while a more spacious setting is used for leads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe genuine spring-reverb system adds natural depth and movement without requiring a separate pedal. Because the level is independently adjustable for each channel, switching channels does not force both sounds to use the same amount of ambience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSwitchable 100W and 50W Output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900 4100 can operate at either 100 watts or 50 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e100-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full-output setting provides maximum:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean headroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBass authority\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStage projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDynamic range\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow-frequency control\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePerformance volume\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is intended for professional stages, loud rehearsals and studios equipped to manage a full-powered valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e50-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe reduced-output setting lowers the available power while retaining the amplifier’s essential tonal character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is useful for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmaller stages\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControlled rehearsals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio sessions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEarlier power-stage response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSituations where the full 100-watt output is unnecessary\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 50-watt setting remains extremely powerful and is not equivalent to a low-volume home-practice mode.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFour 5881 Power Valves\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe power stage uses four 5881 valves to deliver a firm and controlled response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5881 configuration contributes to the amplifier’s:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrong clean headroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTight low-frequency response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eImmediate attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClear note separation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePowerful stage projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDefined high-gain rhythm sound\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier responds dynamically to picking strength, guitar-volume changes and pickup output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShared Four-Band Tone Shaping\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls shape both channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eTreble\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls upper-frequency brightness and attack. Increasing Treble adds definition and cutting power.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eMiddle\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdjusts the core body and projection of the guitar sound. Higher settings produce a fuller and more prominent response, while lower settings create a more scooped character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eBass\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls low-frequency weight. Reducing Bass can tighten heavily distorted rhythm tones, while increasing it adds depth to clean and lower-gain sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003ePresence\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShapes the upper-frequency response of the power stage. Higher settings add bite, immediacy and stage projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe shared EQ helps maintain a consistent tonal foundation when switching between channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAdjustable Effects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear-panel effects loop includes Send and Return connections plus an adjustable level control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes it suitable for compatible:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay pedals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReverb pedals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChorus\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePhaser\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlanger\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTremolo\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMulti-effects units\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRack-mounted processors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe adjustable level helps balance different types of effects equipment with the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing delay, reverb and modulation after the preamp can preserve clarity when Channel B is producing substantial distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProfessional 100W Performance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900 4100 is a full-sized amplifier designed for serious volume and stage authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts 100-watt output provides the headroom and projection required for large cabinets, loud bands and professional live environments. It also delivers a physical low-frequency response that smaller amplifier heads cannot fully reproduce.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt in Bletchley, England\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900 4100 is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts black covering, gold control panel, white script logo and full-width head enclosure retain the unmistakable appearance of a professional Marshall amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a 100W Valve Amplifier Head?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 100-watt valve amplifier provides significantly greater headroom, bass control and stage projection than a compact practice or studio amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is particularly suited to players who need:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean sounds at high performance levels\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTight bass through large speaker cabinets\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrong dynamic response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eConsistent projection across large stages\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSufficient power for loud rock bands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA professional touring amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe physical response of a full-sized valve rig\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing a separate head also allows the speaker cabinet to be selected for each environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 2x12 provides a more transportable setup, while a 4x12 delivers the greatest projection and the traditional JCM900 playing experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRock and Hard-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900’s focused low end, assertive midrange and biting attack make it an excellent amplifier for powerful rhythm work and sustaining lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePunk and Alternative Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts immediate response and aggressive gain suit fast rhythm guitar, power chords and energetic live performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGrunge Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4100’s combination of raw crunch, saturated lead gain and controlled bass is particularly effective for layered 1990s-inspired guitar sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProfessional Gigging Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts 100-watt output, two channels, independent volumes and footswitch operation make it a serious stage amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording Studios\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two channels, dual reverb controls and switchable output provide several related but distinct Marshall sounds from one head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudios equipped with isolation rooms, attenuators or professional load equipment can explore its full gain and power-stage response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A provides a powerful foundation for boosts, overdrives, distortion pedals and fuzz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTime-based and modulation effects can be connected through the adjustable effects loop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlayers Seeking Full-Sized Marshall Authority\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900 4100 is intended for musicians who want the headroom, low-frequency control and physical response of a traditional 100-watt amplifier rather than a reduced-power studio model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOpen Box\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe retail packaging has been opened, so this amplifier is offered at a reduced price rather than as factory-sealed stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team to confirm correct operation. Please refer to the product photographs for its exact cosmetic and packaging presentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall JCM900 4100 Dual Reverb amplifier head\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall PEDL-91004 footswitch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable mains power cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeaker cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eManufacturer documentation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOpen Box example\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRetail packaging has been opened\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInspected and tested for correct operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExact cosmetic and packaging condition shown in the product photographs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur assessment includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstrument input\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel switching\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitch operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A Gain and Volume\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B Lead Gain and Volume\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent Reverb controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpring-reverb operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e100-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e50-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop Send and Return\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop level control\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeaker outputs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eImpedance selector\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePower and standby operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePreamp and power-valve operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChecks for unwanted noise or intermittent controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderstanding the JCM900 4100 Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHigh-Headroom Clean\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse Channel A with a lower Gain setting and raise its Volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis produces a clear and powerful clean sound with sufficient headroom for pedals and high-volume rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel A Crunch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing Channel A Gain introduces progressively more breakup and compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe resulting sound suits blues rock, punk, alternative music and classic-rock rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel B Rock Rhythm\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a moderate Lead Gain setting for focused distortion with strong note separation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis works particularly well for power chords, driving riffs and layered rhythm parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel B High Gain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher Lead Gain settings add compression, saturation and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully balancing Bass, Middle and Presence helps retain clarity when using high-output pickups or lower tunings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLead Boost Setup\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet Channel B slightly louder than Channel A and add the required reverb level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe footswitch can then move directly from a rhythm sound to a louder and more sustaining solo tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal-Platform Configuration\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse Channel A with reduced Gain and greater Volume for a strong clean or edge-of-breakup foundation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExternal boosts, overdrives, distortion pedals and fuzz can then provide additional gain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJCM900 4100\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVintage Reissue\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve guitar amplifier head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstrument Input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1\/4-inch jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLead Gain, Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShared Equalisation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower-Amp Tone Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePresence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDual-control spring reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and Return with level control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter Valve\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFour 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 1\/4-inch jack sockets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSelectable 16Ω, 8Ω or 4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e740mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e310mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 18.8kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack with gold control panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower and Speaker Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall JCM900 4100 requires a suitable mains electricity connection and a compatible external guitar speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must never be powered on without a correctly connected speaker cabinet or properly rated professional load device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe impedance selector must match the total load of the connected cabinet arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCommon configurations include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCabinet Configuration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmplifier Setting\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 16Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 16Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 8Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 8Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 4Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a proper speaker cable between the amplifier and cabinet. A standard screened guitar cable must not be used for this connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe selected cabinet must have sufficient power handling for a 100-watt valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich Speaker Cabinet Should You Choose?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 1960A\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe angled 4x12 format directs the upper speakers towards the player and provides the projection, spread and visual presence associated with a classic Marshall half stack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 1960B\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe straight-front 4x12 offers a focused response with substantial low-frequency authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can be used independently or underneath an angled cabinet as part of a full stack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall 1960AV or 1960BV\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese Vintage cabinets provide a prominent upper-midrange response that works especially well for hard-rock rhythm and lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompatible 2x12 Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA properly rated 2x12 creates a more portable rig while retaining strong projection and low-frequency depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet’s impedance and power handling must be suitable for the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison With Other Marshall Amplifier Heads\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall JCM900 4100\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 4100 provides full 100-watt output, two channels, independent channel volumes, separate spring-reverb controls and the commanding response of a traditional full-sized head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is intended for players who need maximum headroom and stage authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SN20H Studio 900\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H condenses JCM900-inspired tones into a smaller 20-watt head with 5-watt and under-1-watt settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is easier to transport and manage at home, while the 4100 provides substantially greater headroom, bass authority and live projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall JCM800 2203\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM800 2203 uses a more direct single-channel Master Volume design with a raw and aggressive response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900 4100 adds a second channel, dedicated lead gain and independently adjustable reverb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall DSL100HR\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DSL100HR offers a broader modern feature set and multiple gain modes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe JCM900 4100 is aimed at players seeking the more focused response, control layout and distinctive character of Marshall’s early-1990s amplifier generation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the two channels be switched remotely?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The supplied PEDL-91004 footswitch provides remote channel control for live performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow useful is the 50-watt setting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe reduced setting lowers the available output and changes the power-stage response, but it remains extremely loud.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is best considered a more manageable professional setting rather than a quiet home-practice mode.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan delay and reverb pedals be used after the amplifier’s distortion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The adjustable effects loop provides an effective connection point for compatible time-based and modulation effects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for a clean pedalboard rig?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A offers considerable headroom at lower Gain settings, making it a powerful platform for external drive and effects pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be recorded silently?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier does not provide a dedicated silent recording output. Silent operation requires a correctly rated professional reactive-load device designed for a 100-watt valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the amplifier require biasing after power-valve replacement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The power-valve bias must be checked and adjusted by a suitably qualified amplifier technician when the 5881 valves are replaced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the JCM900 suitable for lower tunings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its firm power section and controlled bass response work well for lower tunings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCareful adjustment of Bass and Gain helps preserve definition during heavily distorted rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan two speaker cabinets be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Two speaker outputs are provided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combined cabinet load must match the selected amplifier impedance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall JCM900 4100 remains a formidable professional amplifier for players seeking the focused attack, powerful crunch and sustaining gain that helped define rock guitar throughout the 1990s.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts two channels provide a genuinely useful transition from high-headroom cleans and muscular rhythm tones to saturated leads, while the independent volumes and spring-reverb controls make it practical for live performance. The switchable 100W\/50W output and adjustable effects loop add flexibility without compromising the direct character of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is not a low-volume practice head. It is a full-sized, British-made Marshall designed for substantial speaker cabinets, professional stages and properly equipped studios.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOffered as a professionally checked Open Box example, it represents an excellent opportunity to own an iconic JCM900 Vintage Reissue at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing Fair Deal Music means buying from a passionate team of musicians who genuinely understand the products we sell. Whether you’re purchasing your first instrument, upgrading your current setup or searching for something special, we’re here to help you make the right choice with friendly advice and expert support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trusted independent UK music retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think. We’re always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you’re looking to trade a guitar, amplifier, keyboard, drum kit, pedal or studio equipment, our team can provide a fair, no-obligation valuation and help make your next upgrade more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team or visit the Fair Deal Music Birmingham showroom to discuss your equipment and discover how much you could save.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54880129515900,"sku":"JCM900 4100 OB","price":1100.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/jcm900.jpg?v=1625222989"},{"product_id":"orange-tour-baby-100-twin-channel-100w-guitar-amp-head","title":"Orange Tour Baby 100 Guitar Amplifier Head – B-Stock","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact 100-watt guitar amplifier head designed for players who need serious stage power, flexible clean and driven tones, and a format that integrates easily into professional touring and studio rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts \u003cstrong\u003esingle-ended JFET preamp\u003c\/strong\u003e is voiced to deliver a responsive, valve-inspired playing feel, while the Class A\/B solid-state power section provides \u003cstrong\u003e100 watts into 8 ohms or 70 watts into 16 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e. Separate Clean and Dirty channels cover everything from articulate pedal-platform sounds to classic Orange crunch, with useful extras including built-in clean-channel compression, Presence control, Tight switching and a second footswitchable volume on the Dirty channel for lead boosts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA buffered effects loop, balanced XLR direct output, rackmount compatibility and compact steel chassis make the Tour Baby 100 particularly appealing to gigging players who want a powerful traditional amp head without carrying a large valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis individual amplifier is offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e, creating an attractive opportunity for players looking for a professional Orange head at an alternative to standard new-stock pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/6ZKzrNp9AiQ?si=hbxn1gx59GRDJwHJ\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTour Baby 100\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolid-state guitar amplifier head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-ended JFET\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Amp\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClass A\/B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100W at 8Ω \/ 70W at 16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean and Dirty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean Channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEQ with built-in VCA compression\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty Channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, EQ, Presence, Tight switch and second footswitchable volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuffered\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBalanced XLR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRackmount\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1U compatible\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded Item\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarry gig bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact professional 100W Orange head with flexible live-rig integration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTouring, rehearsals, recording, rock, blues, alternative and pedalboard rigs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eB-Stock Condition Report\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition Classification: B-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Orange Tour Baby 100 is being offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than standard new stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic blemish, packaging variation or other reason for the B-Stock classification has been supplied for this individual amplifier, so no condition details have been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor further information about the cosmetic condition of this particular unit, our team can provide additional guidance before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100 Guitar Amplifier Head\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange carry gig bag\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ Speaker cabinet not included\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ Rack ear kit not included\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo further accessories have been confirmed for this individual B-Stock example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis amplifier is classified as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic damage, faults, repairs or modifications have been supplied for this individual unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eB-Stock amplification is checked by Fair Deal Music before leaving us to make sure it is operating correctly for its intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor an amplifier such as the Tour Baby 100, our checks focus on the main signal path, Clean and Dirty channels, control response, speaker output, switching and major onboard functions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying from a specialist music retailer also means you have access to knowledgeable advice on speaker cabinet matching, pedal integration, rack setups and live amplification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose The Orange Tour Baby 100?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e100 Watts In A Compact Professional Head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tour Baby 100 delivers \u003cstrong\u003e100 watts into an 8-ohm cabinet load\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving it the power required for rehearsals, live performance and professional stage use while remaining significantly more portable than a traditional large-format amplifier head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClean And Dirty Channels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo independent channels give the amplifier greater flexibility than a single-channel pedal-platform design. The Clean side can deliver clear, dynamic guitar tones, while the Dirty channel provides the gain structure needed for crunch, classic rock and more aggressive driven sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt-In Clean Channel Compressor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Clean channel includes a \u003cstrong\u003eVCA compressor\u003c\/strong\u003e with its own control and indicator LED. This lets you smooth dynamic peaks, add sustain and create a more controlled clean sound without dedicating additional pedalboard space to compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSecond Footswitchable Dirty-Channel Volume\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Dirty channel includes an additional \u003cstrong\u003eFS Volume control\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving you a second remotely selectable output level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThat makes it particularly useful for live work: dial in your main rhythm volume, then switch to a higher level for solos or sections that need to move forward in the mix without changing your basic gain or EQ settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePresence And Tight Controls\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Dirty channel goes beyond basic Bass, Middle and Treble EQ. A Presence control lets you adjust upper-frequency cut and clarity, while the Tight switch helps tailor the response for different guitars, tunings and rhythm styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDesigned For Rack Integration\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tour Baby 100 uses a compact \u003cstrong\u003e1U-compatible steel chassis\u003c\/strong\u003e, allowing it to integrate neatly into touring racks and flight cases when used with the appropriate optional rack hardware.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100 Compared With Popular Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100 vs Gain Baby 100\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth models share the compact 100-watt Baby-series concept, but their priorities are different. The \u003cstrong\u003eTour Baby 100\u003c\/strong\u003e focuses on broad clean-to-classic-gain versatility, built-in Clean-channel compression and live rig flexibility. The Gain Baby 100 is the stronger choice for players whose main priority is tighter, more articulate high-gain performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100 vs Dual Baby 100\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Dual Baby 100 focuses on two discrete analogue preamp voices for players who want two more independently shaped channels. The Tour Baby 100 is better suited to players attracted to its specific Clean\/Dirty arrangement, onboard compressor and second footswitchable Dirty-channel volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100 vs Super Crush 100 Head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Super Crush 100 offers traditional Orange head styling and a straightforward two-channel layout in a larger conventional enclosure. The Tour Baby 100 is the better choice for players who prioritise compact size, rack integration, built-in compression and a touring-oriented format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100 vs Pedal Baby 100\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Pedal Baby 100 is primarily a power amplifier for players using external preamps, pedals or modelling equipment. The Tour Baby 100 is a complete amplifier in its own right, with Clean and Dirty preamp channels, gain shaping, compression and EQ already built in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is The Orange Tour Baby 100 For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tour Baby 100 is particularly well suited to players who want a \u003cstrong\u003ecompact professional amplifier that can move easily between conventional cabinet rigs, rack systems and modern touring setups\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a strong choice for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRegularly gigging guitarists\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTouring musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers building rack-based guitar rigs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitarists using large pedalboards\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRock and classic-rock players\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues and alternative musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers who need separate rhythm and lead volumes\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitarists wanting built-in clean compression\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio players who need a compact high-powered head\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMusicians looking for solid-state reliability without giving up amp-style response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for advice on matching the Tour Baby 100 with the right cabinet, pedalboard or live rig? Our experienced team of musicians can help by phone, online or in-store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSuitable Genres And Uses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRock and classic rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Dirty channel provides a natural home for crunchy rhythm sounds and singing lead tones, while the additional footswitchable volume makes solo boosting straightforward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBlues and blues-rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lower gain settings allow the amplifier's responsive preamp to retain picking dynamics and guitar-volume interaction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAlternative and indie:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Clean channel makes a useful platform for delay, modulation, fuzz and other pedal-based textures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePop and function work:\u003c\/strong\u003e Separate channels, compression and footswitchable level control give working players useful flexibility when covering a broad set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTouring:\u003c\/strong\u003e The compact steel chassis, rack compatibility, gig bag and professional connectivity make the Tour Baby 100 especially relevant to musicians who regularly transport their rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStudio recording:\u003c\/strong\u003e Its compact size, balanced output and broad gain range make it easy to integrate into recording-room and rack-based setups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Makes The Tour Baby 100 A Touring-Friendly Guitar Amp?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tour Baby 100 is designed around the idea that professional power does not need to come from an oversized chassis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt only \u003cstrong\u003e300mm wide and 3.59kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is dramatically easier to transport than many traditional 100-watt amplifier heads. It can operate as a standalone compact head or be installed into a standard rack setup with optional rack ears.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe included carry gig bag also makes it practical for players who do not need a permanent flight-case installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Is The Second Dirty-Channel Volume Useful?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMany guitarists need the same basic driven sound at two different volumes: one for rhythm and another for lead parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of adding another boost pedal or changing the gain structure, the Tour Baby 100 provides a second \u003cstrong\u003efootswitchable volume level\u003c\/strong\u003e on the Dirty channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis lets you maintain the same core gain and EQ character while increasing output level when you need the guitar to step forward in the mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStory \u0026amp; Context\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange's amplifier range has traditionally included everything from large valve heads to compact touring solutions, but modern rigs increasingly need to integrate pedals, rack equipment, direct feeds and lighter transport systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eTour Baby 100\u003c\/strong\u003e forms part of Orange's Baby range, alongside models such as the Gain Baby 100 and Dual Baby 100. The range takes full-size amplifier capability and packages it into a compact, rack-compatible format designed around modern working musicians.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tour Baby occupies the more classic and broadly versatile position in that family, combining a dedicated Clean channel with a Dirty channel designed to cover traditional Orange-style gain rather than focusing solely on extreme distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts combination of analogue-style operation, 100-watt output and professional rack integration makes it a contemporary solution built around familiar guitar-amplifier principles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatibility \u0026amp; Recommended Pairings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeaker Cabinets\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tour Baby 100 can deliver:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e100 watts into 8 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e70 watts into 16 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a compatible guitar speaker cabinet or cabinet combination with a minimum total load of \u003cstrong\u003e8 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC112\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA compatible 16-ohm PPC112 creates a relatively compact head-and-cab rig, producing 70 watts from the Tour Baby 100 while keeping the complete setup manageable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable PPC212 provides greater speaker area and projection, making it a natural choice for players using the Tour Baby 100 as a serious stage amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eEffects Pedals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrive, fuzz, wah and boost pedals can be used through the front of the amplifier, while delay, modulation and reverb effects can be routed through the buffered effects loop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRack Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard 1U format allows the Tour Baby 100 to integrate into compatible 19-inch equipment racks using the appropriate optional rack-ear kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuitar amplifier head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100W RMS into 8Ω \/ 70W into 16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Stage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClass A\/B solid-state\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle-ended JFET\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean and Dirty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Switching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront panel or footswitchable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume, Compression, Bass, Treble\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean Compression\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in VCA compressor with indicator LED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Volume, FS Volume, Presence, Bass, Middle, Treble\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty Additional Feature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTight switch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLead Volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSecond footswitchable Dirty-channel volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuffered\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBalanced XLR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eXLR Feature\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGround lift\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum Speaker Load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRack Format\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard 1U compatible\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChassis\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 x 80 x 195mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.59kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUPC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5060299178724\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecification Note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact serial number, production date and specific reason for this amplifier's B-Stock classification have not been supplied and have therefore not been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100 is a mains-powered guitar amplifier head\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt must be connected to a compatible guitar speaker cabinet when using its conventional speaker output. The amplifier supports:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8Ω load – 100W RMS\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e16Ω load – 70W RMS\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not connect a speaker load below \u003cstrong\u003e8 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways connect the amplifier to the speaker cabinet using a proper \u003cstrong\u003espeaker cable\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a standard guitar instrument lead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Tour Baby 100\u003c\/strong\u003e is a particularly clever amplifier for gigging players who want traditional amp controls and serious output without carrying a traditional full-size head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts Clean and Dirty channels cover the essential sounds most players actually need, while the onboard clean compression and second footswitchable Dirty-channel volume add genuinely useful live features rather than unnecessary complexity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe compact 1U-compatible chassis and 3.59kg weight are major practical advantages, especially for musicians already transporting pedalboards, guitars and other rack equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a B-Stock example, it represents an especially interesting option for a player who values professional performance and portability more than receiving a standard new-stock unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBest suited for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Gigging and touring guitarists wanting a powerful, compact two-channel head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain benefit:\u003c\/strong\u003e 100-watt stage performance in a lightweight rack-compatible format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue proposition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Combines a complete two-channel guitar amplifier, compression, lead boosting and professional routing in a much smaller package than a traditional head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout feature:\u003c\/strong\u003e The second footswitchable Dirty-channel volume, allowing easy rhythm-to-lead level changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers usually upgrade from:\u003c\/strong\u003e Smaller practice or rehearsal heads when they need greater output, better live switching and professional connectivity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMost commonly paired with:\u003c\/strong\u003e A quality 1x12 or 2x12 guitar cabinet, compatible footswitches, delay and modulation effects through the buffered loop and a protective rack or carry setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use the additional Dirty-channel volume as a genuine level boost rather than adding more gain for solos. This helps the guitar move forward in a full band mix without becoming unnecessarily saturated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShowroom feedback:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Tour Baby 100 makes particular sense for working guitarists who like the straightforward feel of a conventional amp but increasingly want their complete rig to be lighter, smaller and easier to integrate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you buy from Fair Deal Music, you're choosing one of the UK's most established, independent family run music retailers since 1987.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Birmingham showroom has helped generations of musicians find the right guitars, amplifiers and equipment, backed by a knowledgeable musician-led team who understand the products we sell.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned, B-Stock and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure online ordering\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA large Birmingham showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecades of experience with both new and pre-owned musical equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you're building a compact touring rig, replacing a larger amplifier head or matching a new amp to the right speaker cabinet, we're happy to help you choose the right setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to upgrade your guitar, bass, keyboard, amplifier, drum kit or studio gear, your existing equipment could help reduce the cost of your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply get in touch with our team for a no-obligation valuation, and we'll be happy to discuss the options available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's an easy way to unlock the value of the gear you no longer use while making your next piece of equipment even more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange Tour Baby 100 loud enough for gigging?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It produces up to \u003cstrong\u003e100 watts RMS into an 8-ohm speaker load\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it a serious stage amplifier rather than a practice-only head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use a 16-ohm guitar cabinet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Tour Baby 100 delivers \u003cstrong\u003e70 watts into a 16-ohm load\u003c\/strong\u003e, making compatible 16-ohm cabinets a practical option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Tour Baby 100 have two channels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It has dedicated Clean and Dirty channels that can be switched from the amplifier or remotely using compatible footswitching.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the Clean-channel compressor do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe built-in VCA compressor helps smooth dynamic peaks and increase sustain while retaining useful pick definition. It can be particularly helpful for clean rhythm work and more controlled lead playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the Tour Baby 100 with a pedalboard?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Drive and boost pedals can be connected through the front end, while the buffered effects loop provides a useful position for delay, reverb and modulation effects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the Tour Baby 100 be rack mounted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its chassis is designed around a standard \u003cstrong\u003e1U rack format\u003c\/strong\u003e and can be installed in compatible rack equipment using the appropriate optional rack-ear hardware.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the Tight switch do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tight control alters the Dirty channel's response to help refine the feel and definition of driven tones, particularly useful when switching between different guitars, tunings or styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the FS Volume control for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides a second footswitchable output level on the Dirty channel. This is particularly useful for creating a louder solo setting without changing the Gain or EQ.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Tour Baby 100 a valve amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It uses a \u003cstrong\u003eJFET preamp and Class A\/B solid-state power stage\u003c\/strong\u003e designed to provide responsive, valve-inspired behaviour while retaining solid-state portability and reliability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow does it differ from the Gain Baby 100?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Tour Baby is aimed at players wanting clean through classic driven tones with onboard Clean-channel compression and practical touring features. The Gain Baby is focused more specifically on tight, articulate high-gain sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal Buying Advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock Orange Tour Baby 100 Amplifier Head\u003c\/strong\u003e is an excellent option for players who need a powerful, flexible guitar amp but want to keep their touring or rehearsal setup compact.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith \u003cstrong\u003e100-watt Class A\/B output, JFET preamp voicing, dedicated Clean and Dirty channels, built-in VCA compression, a footswitchable lead volume, buffered effects loop, balanced XLR output and rack-compatible steel chassis\u003c\/strong\u003e, it offers considerably more functionality than its compact dimensions suggest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor gigging guitarists moving away from bulky traditional amplifier heads without wanting to rely entirely on modelling, the Tour Baby 100 provides a compelling middle ground: familiar controls, real speaker-cabinet power and a design built around modern professional rig requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Orange","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54886717129084,"sku":"TOUR-BABY-100","price":359.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/TourBaby100-1.png?v=1737383317"},{"product_id":"marshall-sn20c-jcm900-20w-1x12-combo-open-box","title":"Marshall SN20C JCM900 20W 1x12 Combo, Open Box","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20C Studio 900 brings the focused attack, powerful crunch and versatile two-channel performance of the legendary JCM900 into a compact British-made 20-watt valve combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A covers articulate cleans, responsive breakup and classic British crunch, while Channel B delivers the additional gain, compression and sustain required for hard rock, punk, alternative music and lead playing. Independent Gain, Master Volume and Reverb controls for each channel make it easy to prepare two balanced sounds for live performance or recording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwitchable 20-watt, 5-watt and under-1-watt output modes allow the Studio 900 to move between rehearsals, gigs, studio sessions and lower-volume home practice. Its 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 speaker provides tight bass, defined attack and the cutting projection associated with classic Marshall rock tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Open Box example has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team and offers the complete SN20C Studio 900 experience at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/5I10kQUCbi8?si=vATncnOEweOWOVdk\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20C Studio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve guitar combo amplifier\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen Box\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Modes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean, breakup and medium-gain crunch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic lead and higher-gain rock tones\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-inch Celestion G12T-75\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndependent level for each channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable Send and Return\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect and recording-compensated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitchable Functions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel selection and reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJCM900-inspired versatility with three output levels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, hard rock, punk, alternative music, recording and gigging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall SN20C Studio 900?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eJCM900-Inspired Marshall Character\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C is inspired by the distinctive two-channel JCM900 amplifiers that became a major part of rock music throughout the 1990s and beyond.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts focused low end, assertive midrange and clear upper-frequency attack help rhythm parts remain defined, even when using heavier gain settings. Lead tones have the compression and sustain required to project through a full band mix without becoming indistinct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio format provides this established Marshall character in a considerably more manageable package than a traditional full-powered JCM900 stack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo Independent Channels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 provides two channels with separate Gain, Master Volume and Reverb controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes it possible to prepare two contrasting sounds and balance their levels accurately before switching between them from the amplifier or supplied footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel A\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A covers the cleaner and lower-gain side of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Gain settings provide clear, articulate sounds with useful headroom. Increasing the control introduces progressively more compression, breakup and British-style crunch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A is particularly effective for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndie and alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClassic-rock crunch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEdge-of-breakup sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedal-based guitar rigs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel B\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B provides the amplifier’s lead and higher-gain voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Lead Gain settings produce focused rock overdrive with clear note definition. Increasing the control adds saturation, sustain and compression for heavier rhythm parts and lead playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B works especially well for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHard rock\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeavy alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSustaining lead tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAggressive power chords\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher-gain rock sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIndependent Master Volumes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach channel has its own Master Volume control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows Channel A and Channel B to be balanced precisely, or Channel B can be set slightly louder to create a genuine level boost for lead playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent volumes are also useful when switching between guitars with different pickup outputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThree Output-Power Settings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear-panel power selector provides 20-watt, 5-watt and under-1-watt operating modes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e20-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full-power setting delivers maximum headroom, bass authority and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is ideal for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBand rehearsals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLive performances\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLouder recording sessions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean tones requiring greater headroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSituations where the amplifier needs to compete with acoustic drums\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e5-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-watt setting lowers the overall output while retaining useful body and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt works well for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmaller rehearsals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio recording\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControlled home practice\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDriving the amplifier harder at a lower level\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eUnder-1-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lowest-power setting makes the amplifier significantly easier to manage for home playing and close-miked recording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt allows the Gain controls to be explored at a lower overall output, although the 12-inch speaker can still produce considerable volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCelestion G12T-75 Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C is fitted with a 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 rated at 75 watts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis speaker is known for its controlled bass, defined attack and clear upper-frequency projection. Its response complements the Studio 900’s focused rock voice particularly well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe G12T-75 provides:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTight low frequencies\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClear palm-muted notes\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrong projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDefined high-gain rhythm sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting lead presence\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAmple power handling\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single-speaker format keeps the combo portable while retaining the depth and projection expected from a full-sized 12-inch guitar speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIndependent Reverb Controls\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A and Channel B each have a dedicated Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows different ambience settings to be prepared for each sound. Channel A can use subtle reverb for clean rhythm playing, while Channel B can be set with additional depth for leads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe effect can be switched remotely using the supplied footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShared Marshall Equalisation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass controls shape both channels, while Presence adjusts the high-frequency response of the power-amplifier section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eTreble\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls upper-frequency brightness and attack. Higher settings create a sharper and more cutting response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eMiddle\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShapes the central voice of the guitar. Increasing Middle adds fullness and projection, while lower settings produce a more scooped character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eBass\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls low-frequency weight. Reducing Bass can tighten heavily driven rhythm tones, while increasing it adds depth to clean and crunch sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003ePresence\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdds bite and immediacy to the power-amplifier response. It is useful for adapting the amplifier to different rooms, guitars and band arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAdjustable Effects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 includes an effects loop with Send, Return and adjustable level controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe level can be matched to conventional floor pedals or professional rack equipment, making the loop suitable for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional reverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChorus\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePhaser\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlanger\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTremolo\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMulti-effects processors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRack-mounted effects\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing time-based and modulation effects after the amplifier’s gain stages can help them remain clear when Channel B is producing heavier distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDirect and Recording Outputs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear panel provides two line-output options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eDirect Output\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Direct output supplies an unfiltered preamp signal for connection to compatible external audio equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eRecording-Compensated Output\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe compensated output applies filtering intended for connection to compatible recording equipment or a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese outputs provide useful options for studio work, live reinforcement and more advanced amplifier systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable speaker load must remain connected whenever the amplifier is operating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExternal Speaker Connectivity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C provides speaker outputs supporting approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the internal Celestion speaker to be supplemented or replaced by a compatible external cabinet when greater projection or a different speaker character is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt in Bletchley, England\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt combines traditional Marshall styling and JCM900-inspired sound with the portability and power control of the modern Studio range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a 20W 1x12 Valve Combo?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 20-watt valve combo provides an effective balance between professional sound, useful performance volume and manageable dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier and speaker are contained within a single enclosure, reducing the amount of equipment that needs to be transported and connected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe three output modes make the SN20C especially versatile. It can deliver the headroom and projection required for rehearsals and live performance at 20 watts, while the reduced settings make it easier to use in studios and home environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts 1x12 format also provides greater low-frequency depth and projection than a small practice amplifier without the bulk of a 2x12 or 4x12 system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRock and Hard-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900’s controlled low end, prominent midrange and clear attack make it ideally suited to rhythm crunch and sustaining lead sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePunk and Alternative Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts immediate response and assertive character work particularly well for energetic rhythm playing, aggressive power chords and live performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGigging Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt setting provides useful stage projection, while the compact combo enclosure is easier to transport than a separate amplifier head and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe included footswitch provides practical control over channel selection and reverb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree output modes, two channels, an adjustable effects loop and recording outputs make the SN20C highly flexible in a studio.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can provide multiple clean, crunch and lead sounds without changing amplifiers between takes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHome Players Seeking Professional Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe under-1-watt setting makes the Studio 900 considerably easier to manage at home than a traditional 50-watt or 100-watt JCM900.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt remains capable of substantial volume, but its power reduction provides far greater control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A provides a strong platform for boosts, overdrives, distortion pedals and fuzz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay, reverb and modulation effects can be connected through the adjustable effects loop for improved clarity when using amplifier distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOpen Box\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe retail packaging has been opened, and the amplifier is offered at a reduced price rather than as factory-sealed stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team to confirm correct operation. Please refer to the product photographs for the exact cosmetic and packaging presentation of this individual example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall SN20C Studio 900 1x12 combo amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall two-button footswitch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable mains power cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eManufacturer documentation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOpen Box example\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePackaging has been opened\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAmplifier checked for correct operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExact cosmetic and packaging condition shown in the product photographs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur assessment includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFront-panel channel selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitch channel selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A Gain control\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B Lead Gain control\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent Master Volume controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent Reverb controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitchable reverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e20-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e5-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnder-1-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop Send and Return\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop level adjustment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDirect line output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecording-compensated output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInternal Celestion speaker\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExternal speaker connections\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePower and standby operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eValve operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChecks for unwanted noise and intermittent controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderstanding the Studio 900 Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel A Clean\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a low Channel A Gain setting and raise its Master Volume for a bright and articulate clean sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis works especially well with single-coil pickups, modulation effects and pedal-based rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel A Crunch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing Channel A Gain introduces progressively more breakup and compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe resulting response suits blues, indie, punk and classic-rock rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel B Classic Lead\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Channel B Lead Gain settings provide focused rock overdrive with strong note definition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis sound works well for power-chord rhythm playing and expressive lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel B High Gain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher Lead Gain settings add distortion, compression and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBalancing the Bass and Presence controls carefully can produce a tight and defined response for heavier rhythm parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLower-Volume Driven Sounds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelecting the 5-watt or under-1-watt mode allows the channel Gain controls to be increased at a lower overall output than the full 20-watt setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStudio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Technology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve amplification with JCM900-inspired hybrid circuitry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Settings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Master Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLead Gain, Master Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShared Equalisation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower-Amp Tone Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePresence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Selection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront-panel switch or supplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndependent level for each channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb Switching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter Valve\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x12-inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCelestion G12T-75\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Power Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and Return with adjustable level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects-Loop Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately -10dBV to +4dBu\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnfiltered preamp line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecording Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompensated line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupported Speaker Loads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω, 8Ω and 4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 505mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 463mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 249mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 18kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack with gold control panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower and Speaker Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C operates from mains electricity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts internal Celestion speaker presents a 16-ohm load. Compatible external speaker configurations can also be connected through the dedicated rear-panel outputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRequired Output\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 16Ω speaker or cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x16Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 8Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x8Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 16Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x16Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 4Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x4Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 8Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x8Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must never be operated without a suitable speaker load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a dedicated speaker cable when connecting an external cabinet. A standard screened guitar cable is not suitable for this purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison With Other Marshall Studio Amplifiers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SN20C Studio 900\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 provides two channels, independent Gain, Master Volume and Reverb controls, plus a focused JCM900-inspired sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is an excellent choice for players who want clean, crunch and lead tones available from one compact combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SC20C Studio Classic\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Classic is inspired by the single-channel JCM800 2203.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt offers a more direct Master Volume response, while the Studio 900 provides greater channel-switching flexibility and built-in reverb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SV20C Studio Vintage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Vintage is based on the earlier 1959 Super Lead format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides an open Plexi-style response with bridgeable channels, while the Studio 900 offers dedicated channel switching and more readily available high-gain sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall ST20C Studio JTM\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio JTM offers a softer attack, fuller bass and earlier vintage-style breakup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is tighter, brighter and better suited to aggressive rock and higher-gain playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Marshall SN20C have two channels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A covers clean to medium-drive sounds, while Channel B provides classic lead tones and additional gain and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the channels be changed with a footswitch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The included two-button footswitch controls Channel A\/B selection and switches the reverb on or off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes each channel have its own reverb setting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A and Channel B each have a dedicated Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich speaker is fitted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C contains a 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 rated at 75 watts and 16 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for home use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier includes 5-watt and under-1-watt modes for more controlled output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can still produce considerable volume through its 12-inch speaker, even at the lowest setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have an effects loop?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The adjustable Send and Return loop supports compatible floor pedals, multi-effects units and professional rack processors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it connect directly to recording equipment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe recording-compensated output can be connected to compatible recording equipment or a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable speaker load must remain connected whenever the amplifier is operating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an external speaker cabinet be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The SN20C supports approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm speaker configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Studio 900 made in the UK?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does Open Box mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe retail packaging has been opened, so the amplifier is not being sold as factory-sealed stock. It has been inspected and checked for correct operation before sale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20C Studio 900 combines the clean, crunch and lead versatility of the JCM900 format with the portability and power control of the modern Studio range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts two independent channels make it practical for live use, while the three power settings allow it to move comfortably between gigs, recording sessions and controlled home practice. The Celestion G12T-75 provides the tight bass, defined attack and cutting projection needed for authoritative Marshall rock tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent channel volumes and reverb settings, footswitch control, an adjustable effects loop and direct-output options give the SN20C far more flexibility than a straightforward vintage-style combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOffered as a professionally checked Open Box example, it represents an excellent opportunity to own a versatile British-made Marshall amplifier at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing Fair Deal Music means buying from a passionate team of musicians who genuinely understand the products we sell. Whether you're purchasing your first instrument, upgrading your current setup or searching for something special, we're here to help you make the right choice with friendly advice and expert support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trusted independent UK music retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think. We're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to trade a guitar, amplifier, keyboard, drum kit, pedal or studio equipment, our team can provide a fair, no-obligation valuation and help make your next upgrade more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team or visit the Fair Deal Music Birmingham showroom to discuss your equipment and discover how much you could save.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":54939678048636,"sku":"Open Box SN20C","price":1180.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/01-marshall-studio-900-combo-amp.jpg?v=1737031722"},{"product_id":"peavey-valveking-ii-20-watt-1x12-combo-amplifier","title":"Peavey ValveKing II 20 Watt 1x12 Combo Amplifier","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003ePeavey developed the ValveKing Series of amplifiers with one goal in mind – to put real boutique features and tone technology into the hands of real working musicians. In stark contrast to similarly featured \"boutique\" amplifiers, the ValveKing is no trophy-room amp – it’s rugged, road-ready and made to be played.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003eFor the recording musician, the ValveKing features a USB recording output, which pipes the mic'd amp vibe directly into a computer. On the rear panel, the built-in Peavey MSDI (Microphone Simulated Direct Interface) XLR direct interface eliminates the need for a microphone by allowing users to send the amp’s signal directly to a recording device or mixing console.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003eWith versatile tone for rock, jazz, or metal, you have the capabilities to create almost any sound.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo independent footswitchable channels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eSeparate EQ for each channel\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eReverb with level control\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eBuffered effects loop\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eDamping control – controls Presence and Resonance at the same time\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eVari-Class variable Class A simulation control\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eExclusive Microphone Simulated Direct Interface (MSDI) output with ground lift and speaker mute switch\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eOne 12\" ValveKing Speaker\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003e20W, 5W, and 1W power switch\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eUSB direct recording output\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (mm): \u003c\/strong\u003e521 x 559 x 260\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight (kg): \u003c\/strong\u003e17kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Peavey","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55095645503868,"sku":"VK20","price":340.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/pvvk20_1.jpg?v=1744031249"},{"product_id":"peavey-valveking-ii-100-watt-amp-head","title":"Peavey ValveKing II 100 Watt Amp Head","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003ePeavey developed the ValveKing Series of amplifiers with one goal in mind – to put real boutique features and tone technology into the hands of real working musicians. In stark contrast to similarly featured \"boutique\" amplifiers, the ValveKing is no trophy-room amp – it’s rugged, road-ready and made to be played.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003eFor the recording musician, the ValveKing features a USB recording output, which pipes the mic'd amp vibe directly into a computer. On the rear panel, the built-in Peavey MSDI (Microphone Simulated Direct Interface) XLR direct interface eliminates the need for a microphone by allowing users to send the amp’s signal directly to a recording device or mixing console.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan\u003eWith versatile tone for rock, jazz, or metal, you have the capabilities to create almost any sound.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo independent footswitchable channels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eSeparate EQ for each channel\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eReverb with level control\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eBuffered effects loop\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eResonance and Presence controls\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eVari-Class variable Class A simulation control\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eExclusive Microphone Simulated Direct Interface (MSDI) output with ground lift and speaker mute switch\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cspan\u003e100W, 25W, and 5W power switch\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cspan\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cspan\u003eUSB direct recording output\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDimensions (mm): \u003c\/strong\u003e406 x 781 x 378\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeight: \u003c\/strong\u003e19kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Peavey","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55095802233212,"sku":"VK100H","price":389.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/118343_25479.jpg?v=1744035565"},{"product_id":"marshall-sn20h-jcm900-20w-valve-head-ex-display","title":"Marshall SN20H JCM900 20W Valve Head, (Ex-Display)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20H Studio 900 brings the distinctive power, clarity and aggressive crunch of the legendary JCM900 into a compact, British-made 20-watt amplifier head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts two-channel design covers everything from bright cleans and responsive British crunch to saturated rock leads, with separate Gain, Volume and Reverb controls for each channel. Shared Treble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls make it easy to shape the amplifier around different guitars, speaker cabinets and playing environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwitchable 20-watt, 5-watt and under-1-watt output modes make the SN20H suitable for live performance, band rehearsals, studio recording and controlled home practice. An adjustable effects loop, direct line output and recording-compensated output provide the connectivity required for modern pedalboards, rack processors and recording setups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Ex-Display amplifier has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team and offers the complete Studio 900 experience at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/5I10kQUCbi8?si=vATncnOEweOWOVdk\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20H Studio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInspiration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall JCM900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve guitar amplifier head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEx-Display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Modes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean to medium drive and crunch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic lead to higher-gain sustain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in with independent control for each channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and return with adjustable level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect and recording-compensated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFive outputs supporting 16Ω, 8Ω and 4Ω loads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJCM900-inspired tones with modern power control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, hard rock, punk, alternative music, recording and gigging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall SN20H Studio 900?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIconic JCM900-Inspired Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H is inspired by the two-channel Marshall JCM900, an amplifier associated with the powerful rock sounds of the 1990s and beyond.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts focused low end, assertive midrange and biting upper-frequency response help guitar parts remain clear within dense band arrangements. The amplifier delivers strong note separation for rhythm playing while retaining the sustain and compression required for expressive lead work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lower-powered Studio format provides this recognisable character without the extreme output of the original full-sized amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo Versatile Channels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H provides two channels with separate Gain, Master Volume and Reverb controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows two complete sounds to be prepared and selected using the front-panel button or included footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel A\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A covers the cleaner and lower-gain side of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Gain settings produce bright, articulate clean sounds with useful headroom. Increasing the control introduces medium drive, compression and British-style crunch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A is ideal for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndie and alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClassic-rock crunch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEdge-of-breakup sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedal-based rigs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel B\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B provides the amplifier’s lead and higher-gain voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Lead Gain settings deliver focused classic-rock overdrive, while higher settings introduce additional saturation, compression and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B works particularly well for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHard-rock rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeavy alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSustaining lead sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAggressive power chords\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher-gain rock tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIndependent Channel Volumes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach channel has its own Master Volume control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes it possible to balance a clean or crunch sound on Channel A against a louder lead sound on Channel B. The amplifier can therefore provide a genuine level increase for solos rather than simply adding more distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe independent controls are also useful when changing between guitars with different pickup outputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIndependent Reverb Settings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A and Channel B each have their own Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA subtle setting can be used on Channel A to add depth to cleaner sounds, while Channel B can be configured with more ambience for lead playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe reverb can be switched on and off remotely using the supplied footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThree Output-Power Settings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA rear-panel selector lets the Studio 900 operate at 20 watts, 5 watts or less than 1 watt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e20-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full-power setting provides maximum headroom, bass authority and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the best choice for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBand rehearsals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLive performances\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger speaker cabinets\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean tones requiring greater headroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLouder studio sessions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e5-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-watt setting reduces the overall output while retaining useful body and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt works well for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmaller rehearsals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecording sessions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControlled practice\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDriving the amplifier at a lower overall level\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eUnder-1-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lowest setting makes the amplifier significantly more manageable for home practice and close-miked recording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt allows the Gain controls to be explored at a lower output than the 20-watt setting, although the final volume will still depend on the efficiency and size of the connected speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e5881-Powered Valve Performance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 uses two ECC83 preamp valves, an ECC83 phase splitter and two 5881 power valves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5881 output section provides a firm and controlled response with strong note definition. It complements the tighter low end and direct attack associated with the JCM900 sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier responds naturally to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePicking strength\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitar-volume adjustments\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePickup selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePickup output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGain and volume settings\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeaker and cabinet choice\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShared Marshall Equalisation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls shape both channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eTreble\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls upper-frequency brightness and attack. Increasing Treble adds clarity and helps notes cut through a band mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eMiddle\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdjusts the central voice of the guitar. Higher settings create a fuller and more prominent sound, while lower settings provide a more scooped response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eBass\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls low-frequency weight and depth. Lower settings can help tighten heavily driven rhythm tones, while higher settings add fullness to clean and crunch sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003ePresence\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShapes the upper-frequency response of the power-amplifier section. Increasing Presence adds bite, immediacy and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAdjustable Effects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H includes effects-loop Send and Return connections with a continuously adjustable level control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe loop can be matched to equipment operating between approximately -10dBV and +4dBu.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower settings are suitable for many conventional floor pedals, while higher settings accommodate compatible rack processors and professional line-level equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe effects loop is particularly useful for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional reverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChorus\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePhaser\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlanger\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTremolo\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMulti-effects processors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRack-mounted effects\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing these effects after the amplifier’s gain stages can help them remain clearer when Channel B is producing heavier distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDirect Line Output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Direct output provides an unfiltered preamp signal for connection to compatible external equipment, including a separate power amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis provides additional flexibility for more advanced studio and live systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable speaker load must remain connected while the amplifier is operating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording-Compensated Output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe recording-compensated line output provides a filtered signal for connection to suitable recording equipment or a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCapturing ideas at home\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio recording\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSending an additional signal to a live mixing desk\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCombining direct and microphone signals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier still requires a correctly connected speaker cabinet or professional load device when this output is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFlexible Speaker Connections\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive speaker outputs support approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm cabinet configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the SN20H to be used with:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA compact 1x12 cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA portable 2x12 cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA traditional 4x12 cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo compatible cabinets\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDifferent speaker types for recording or live performance\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChanging the cabinet can significantly alter the amplifier’s bass response, projection, brightness and overall feel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMade in Bletchley, England\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts compact enclosure retains the traditional black covering, gold control panel and white Marshall script associated with the company’s professional amplifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a Separate Valve Amplifier Head?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA separate amplifier head provides greater flexibility than a combo with a permanently installed speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers can select a cabinet based on the requirements of each situation. A 1x12 provides portability for home and studio use, while a 2x12 offers greater sound dispersion and low-frequency depth. A 4x12 delivers the physical projection and stage presence associated with a traditional Marshall stack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSeparating the amplifier from the cabinet also makes it easier to transport each part individually and allows different speaker combinations to be explored without changing the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H’s three output settings make this flexibility particularly useful. The same amplifier can form part of a compact recording setup or a larger professional stage rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRock and Hard-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe focused bass, cutting attack and prominent midrange make the Studio 900 ideally suited to rhythm crunch and sustaining lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B provides ample drive for heavier rock sounds without requiring a separate distortion pedal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePunk and Alternative Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier’s immediate response and assertive voice work particularly well for energetic rhythm guitar, aggressive power chords and live performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGigging Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt setting provides useful stage output, particularly when paired with an efficient 2x12 or 4x12 cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe included footswitch allows Channel A\/B selection and reverb switching during a performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree power settings, two independent channels, an adjustable effects loop and dual line outputs make the SN20H highly practical in a recording environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDifferent cabinets and microphones can also be used to create several distinct sounds from one amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHome Players Seeking Professional Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe under-1-watt setting makes the Studio 900 more manageable in a domestic environment than a traditional 50-watt or 100-watt JCM900.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can still produce considerable volume through an efficient cabinet, but the reduced-power mode provides far greater control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A provides a strong foundation for boosts, overdrives, distortion pedals, fuzz and compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay, reverb and modulation effects can be connected through the adjustable effects loop when greater clarity is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePlayers Who Use Multiple Cabinets\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe separate-head design and extensive speaker connections make the SN20H an excellent choice for players who already own compatible cabinets or want to build a modular amplifier rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEx-Display\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis amplifier has been displayed in the Fair Deal Music showroom and is offered at a reduced price rather than as factory-sealed stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team to confirm correct operation. Please examine the product photographs for the exact cosmetic presentation of this individual amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall SN20H Studio 900 amplifier head\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall two-button footswitch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable mains power cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExternal speaker cabinet and speaker cable are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEx-display example\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePreviously displayed in the Fair Deal Music showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInspected and tested for correct operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProduct photographs show the exact cosmetic condition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier has been checked by the Fair Deal Music team before sale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur assessment includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFront-panel channel selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitch channel selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A Gain control\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B Lead Gain control\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent Master Volume controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent Reverb controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitchable reverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e20-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e5-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnder-1-watt mode\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop Send and Return\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop level adjustment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDirect line output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecording-compensated line output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpeaker output connections\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePower and standby operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eValve operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChecks for unwanted noise or intermittent controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderstanding the Studio 900 Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel A Clean\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet the Channel A Gain low and raise its Master Volume for a bright and articulate clean sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis configuration works well with single-coil pickups, modulation effects and pedal-based rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel A Crunch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing the Channel A Gain introduces progressively more drive and compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe resulting sound is ideal for blues, indie, punk and classic-rock rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel B Classic Lead\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Channel B Lead Gain settings provide focused rock overdrive with clear note definition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis works well for power-chord rhythm playing and expressive lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel B High Gain\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher Lead Gain settings introduce additional distortion, compression and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBalancing the Bass and Presence controls can create a tight, defined response for heavier rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLower-Volume Driven Sounds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelecting the 5-watt or under-1-watt setting allows the channel Gain controls to be increased at a lower overall output than the full 20-watt mode.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal-Platform Setup\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse Channel A with reduced Gain and greater Master Volume for a clearer base tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoost, overdrive, distortion and fuzz pedals can then provide additional gain from the front of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20H\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStudio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Technology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve amplification with JCM900-inspired hybrid circuitry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Settings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Master Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLead Gain, Master Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShared Equalisation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower-Amp Tone Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePresence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Selection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront-panel switch or supplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in with independent channel settings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb Switching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and Return with level control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects-Loop Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable from approximately -10dBV to +4dBu\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnfiltered preamp line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecording Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompensated line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFive 1\/4-inch jack sockets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupported Speaker Loads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω, 8Ω and 4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 510mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 245mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 240mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 11.2kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack with gold control panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower and Speaker Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20H requires a suitable mains electricity connection and a compatible external guitar speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must never be powered on without a correctly connected speaker cabinet or suitable professional load device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproved cabinet configurations include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCabinet Configuration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpeaker Output\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 16Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x16Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 8Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x8Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 16Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x16Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 4Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x4Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 8Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x8Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a dedicated speaker cable between the amplifier and cabinet. A screened guitar instrument cable is not suitable for this connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe connected cabinet must have sufficient power handling for the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich Speaker Cabinet Should You Choose?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompact 1x12 Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA compatible 1x12 creates the most portable Studio 900 rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is ideal for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHome practice\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio recording\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmaller stages\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMusicians who regularly transport their equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e2x12 Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 2x12 provides greater sound dispersion, bass response and stage projection while remaining easier to move than a traditional 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is an excellent all-round pairing for rehearsals and live performances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e4x12 Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 4x12 delivers the strongest physical projection and the traditional feel of a Marshall stack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is particularly well suited to larger stages, professional studios and players seeking maximum authority from the 20-watt output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeaker Choice\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA Celestion G12T-75-style cabinet will emphasise tight bass and cutting upper frequencies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA more vintage-voiced speaker can add warmer midrange, earlier compression and a softer high-frequency response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison With Other Marshall Studio Heads\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SN20H Studio 900\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H provides two channels, independent channel volumes, separate reverb controls and a focused JCM900-inspired sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the strongest choice for players who need clean, crunch and lead sounds from one compact head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SC20H Studio Classic\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SC20H is inspired by the single-channel JCM800 2203.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt offers a more straightforward Master Volume design and raw, aggressive crunch, while the SN20H provides channel switching, greater tonal variety and built-in reverb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SV20H Studio Vintage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SV20H is based on the earlier 1959 Super Lead format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides an open and highly dynamic Plexi-style response with bridgeable channels. The Studio 900 offers easier channel switching, separate gain structures and more readily available lead saturation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall ST20H Studio JTM\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ST20H delivers a softer attack, fuller bass and earlier vintage-style breakup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H has a tighter and brighter response that is better suited to aggressive rock and higher-gain playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall DSL20HR\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe DSL20HR provides modern Marshall versatility with Classic Gain and Ultra Gain channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H is aimed at players seeking the more focused character, control layout and heritage of the JCM900 platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Marshall SN20H include a speaker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20H is an amplifier head and must be connected to a suitable external guitar speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have two channels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A covers clean to medium-drive sounds, while Channel B provides classic lead tones and greater gain and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the channels be changed with a footswitch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The supplied two-button footswitch controls Channel A\/B selection and switches the reverb on or off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes each channel have its own reverb setting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A and Channel B each have a dedicated Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have an effects loop?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Send and Return connections are accompanied by an adjustable level control suitable for compatible pedals and rack processors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be connected directly to recording equipment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe recording-compensated output can be connected to compatible recording equipment or a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable speaker cabinet or professional load device must remain connected while the amplifier is operating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan two cabinets be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The SN20H supports approved dual-cabinet configurations using two 16-ohm cabinets or two 8-ohm cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe correct paired outputs must be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for home playing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier includes 5-watt and under-1-watt settings for more controlled output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe final volume will depend on the connected cabinet and speaker efficiency.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Studio 900 made in the UK?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Studio 900 completely valve-driven?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier uses ECC83 preamp and phase-splitter valves with two 5881 power valves. Its JCM900-inspired architecture also incorporates solid-state components alongside its valve amplification stages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20H Studio 900 successfully brings the versatility and focused aggression of the JCM900 into a compact format that is far easier to use in modern playing environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts two channels cover bright cleans, muscular crunch and sustaining lead sounds, while the independent volumes and reverb settings make it practical for live performance. Three output levels, an adjustable effects loop and two line-output options add valuable recording and pedalboard flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe separate-head design also lets players choose exactly how compact or powerful the completed rig should be.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOffered in professionally checked Ex-Display condition, this is an excellent opportunity to own a versatile British-made Marshall amplifier at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing Fair Deal Music means buying from a passionate team of musicians who genuinely understand the products we sell. Whether you’re purchasing your first instrument, upgrading your current setup or searching for something special, we’re here to help you make the right choice with friendly advice and expert support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trusted independent UK music retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think. We’re always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you’re looking to trade a guitar, amplifier, keyboard, drum kit, pedal or studio equipment, our team can provide a fair, no-obligation valuation and help make your next upgrade more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team or visit the Fair Deal Music Birmingham showroom to discuss your equipment and discover how much you could save.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55633455120764,"sku":"EX-SN20H","price":989.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/01-marshall-studio-900-head.jpg?v=1737031610"},{"product_id":"marshall-sn20c-jcm900-20w-1x12-combo-ex-display","title":"Marshall SN20C JCM900 20W 1x12 Combo, (Ex-Display)","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20C Studio 900 captures the powerful crunch, precise attack and distinctive tonal character of the legendary JCM900 in a more compact and manageable 20-watt combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts two-channel design delivers everything from clear cleans and responsive crunch to saturated lead tones, with independent Gain, Volume and Reverb controls for each channel. Shared Treble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls provide straightforward tone shaping, while the supplied footswitch allows effortless channel changes and reverb switching during a performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwitchable 20-watt, 5-watt and under-1-watt settings make the SN20C suitable for live performances, rehearsals, recording and controlled home practice. A 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 speaker delivers tight bass, clear attack and the cutting upper-frequency response associated with classic Marshall rock tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Ex-Display amplifier has been professionally checked by Fair Deal Music and offers the full performance of the Studio 900 at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/5I10kQUCbi8?si=vATncnOEweOWOVdk\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20C Studio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInspired By\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall JCM900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve guitar combo amplifier\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEx-Display\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Modes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean to medium drive and crunch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic lead to higher-gain sustain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12-inch Celestion G12T-75\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 watts at 16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated spring reverb with independent channel controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, with adjustable level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect and recording-compensated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncluded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJCM900-inspired tone in a portable, power-switchable combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, hard rock, punk, alternative music, recording and gigging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall SN20C Studio 900?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic JCM900-Inspired Character\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is inspired by the distinctive sound and versatility of Marshall’s two-channel JCM900 amplifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt delivers the tightly controlled bass, assertive midrange and biting upper-frequency response that allows guitar parts to remain clear and prominent within a full band mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C can move from sparkling cleans and responsive crunch to compressed, sustaining lead tones without requiring a collection of external gain pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo Versatile Channels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier features two channels with separate Gain, Volume and Reverb controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows each channel to be configured for a different sound and selected instantly using the front-panel switch or supplied footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel A\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A covers the cleaner and lower-gain side of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Gain settings produce bright and articulate clean sounds. Increasing the control introduces medium drive and muscular British crunch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A is ideal for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndie and alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClassic-rock crunch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEdge-of-breakup tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedal-based guitar rigs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel B\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B delivers the amplifier’s higher-gain lead voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Lead Gain settings provide focused classic-rock overdrive, while higher settings add compression, saturation and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B is particularly effective for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHard-rock rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeavy alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSustaining lead tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAggressive power chords\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher-gain rock sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThree Power Settings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA rear-panel power selector allows the amplifier to operate at 20 watts, 5 watts or less than 1 watt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e20-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt setting provides maximum headroom, low-frequency authority and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is suitable for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBand rehearsals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLive performances\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLouder studio sessions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean tones with greater headroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse with external speaker cabinets\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e5-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-watt setting reduces the output while retaining useful body and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a strong choice for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSmaller rehearsals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio recording\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControlled practice\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDriving the amplifier at a lower level\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eUnder-1-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lowest-power setting makes the SN20C considerably more manageable for home use and close-miked recording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt allows the channel gain controls to be explored at a lower output level while retaining the character of the amplifier’s main signal path.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCelestion G12T-75 Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C is fitted with a 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 speaker rated at 75 watts and 16 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe G12T-75 is known for its controlled low frequencies, clear attack and defined upper-frequency response. This voicing complements the focused and aggressive character of the Studio 900.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTight bass response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClear palm-muted notes\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrong projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDefined high-gain rhythm sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting lead presence\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAmple power handling\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe single-speaker configuration keeps the combo portable while retaining the depth and projection expected from a full-sized 12-inch guitar speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIndependent Reverb Controls\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach channel has its own Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows different ambience settings to be prepared for clean, rhythm and lead sounds. Channel A can be configured with subtle depth, while Channel B can use a more spacious reverb setting for lead playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplied footswitch can switch the reverb effect on or off remotely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShared Marshall Equalisation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass controls shape the preamp response of both channels, while Presence adjusts the upper frequencies of the power-amplifier section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eTreble\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls upper-frequency clarity and attack. Higher settings produce a brighter and more cutting sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eMiddle\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShapes the central voice of the guitar. Higher settings add fullness and projection, while lower settings produce a more scooped response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eBass\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls low-frequency weight and depth. Reducing Bass can tighten high-gain rhythm sounds, while increasing it adds fullness to cleans and crunch tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003ePresence\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdjusts bite and immediacy within the power-amplifier response. It is useful for balancing the amplifier for different rooms, speakers and band arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAdjustable Effects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 includes an effects loop with Send, Return and adjustable level controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe loop level can be set between approximately -10dBV and +4dBu, allowing the amplifier to accommodate conventional floor pedals and professional rack equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides an effective connection point for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional reverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChorus\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePhaser\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlanger\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTremolo\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMulti-effects processors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRack-mounted effects\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing time-based and modulation effects after the amplifier’s gain stages can help them remain clear when Channel B is producing heavier distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDirect and Recording Outputs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear panel provides two line-output options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eDirect Line Output\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Direct output supplies an unfiltered preamp signal for connection to compatible external equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eRecording-Compensated Output\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe compensated output applies filtering designed for connection to suitable recording equipment or a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese outputs add flexibility for studio recording, live reinforcement and more advanced amplifier systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable speaker load must remain connected whenever the amplifier is operating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExternal Speaker Connections\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive speaker-output sockets support approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the internal Celestion speaker to be supplemented or the amplifier to be connected to a compatible external cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePairing the SN20C with an additional cabinet can provide:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreater sound dispersion\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreased stage projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA broader speaker response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional low-frequency authority\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA different overall tonal character\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt in Bletchley, England\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt combines classic Marshall styling and JCM900-inspired sounds with the portability and power control of the modern Studio range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a 20W 1x12 Valve Combo?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 20-watt valve combo provides a practical balance between professional sound, useful stage output and manageable dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier and speaker are contained within one enclosure, reducing the amount of equipment that needs to be transported and connected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C’s three power modes make it particularly versatile. It can provide the projection needed for rehearsals and performances at 20 watts, while the reduced settings make it easier to use in studios and home environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts 1x12 configuration delivers greater depth and projection than a small practice amplifier without the size and weight of a 2x12 or 4x12 system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRock and Hard-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe focused low end, prominent midrange and cutting attack make the Studio 900 ideal for classic and modern rock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B supplies the additional saturation and sustain required for heavy rhythm sounds and expressive solos.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePunk and Alternative Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier’s immediate response and assertive voice are particularly well suited to energetic rhythm playing, power chords and aggressive live performances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGigging Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt mode provides useful stage projection, while the compact combo enclosure is easier to transport than a full-sized JCM900 head and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplied footswitch provides convenient control over channel selection and reverb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree output-power settings, two channels, an adjustable effects loop and recording outputs make the SN20C highly practical in a studio.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can provide multiple clean, crunch and lead sounds without changing amplifiers between takes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHome Players Seeking Professional Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe under-1-watt mode gives players access to genuine Studio 900 character at a more controlled level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier can still produce substantial volume through its efficient 12-inch speaker, but the power reduction makes it significantly more manageable than a traditional 50-watt or 100-watt JCM900.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A provides a strong platform for boosts, overdrives, distortion pedals and fuzz effects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay, reverb and modulation effects can be connected through the adjustable effects loop for improved clarity when using amplifier distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEx-Display\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis amplifier has been displayed in our showroom and is offered at a reduced price rather than as factory-sealed stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt has been professionally inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team to confirm correct operation. Please examine the product photographs for the exact cosmetic presentation of this individual amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall SN20C Studio 900 1x12 combo amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall two-button footswitch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable mains power cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEx-display example\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDisplayed in the Fair Deal Music showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessionally checked for correct operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProduct photographs show the exact cosmetic condition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur team has inspected and tested this amplifier before sale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe assessment includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFront-panel channel switching\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitch channel switching\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGain and Lead Gain controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent channel Volume controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent channel Reverb controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitchable reverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e20-watt, 5-watt and under-1-watt modes\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop Send and Return\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop level adjustment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDirect line output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecording-compensated output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInternal Celestion speaker\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExternal speaker connections\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePower and standby functions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eValve operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChecks for unwanted noise and intermittent controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderstanding the Studio 900 Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClean Channel A\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a low Channel A Gain setting and increase the Volume control for a clear, articulate clean sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis setting works particularly well with single-coil pickups, modulation effects and pedal-based rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel A Crunch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing the Channel A Gain introduces progressively more drive and compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result is a responsive rhythm sound suited to blues, indie, punk and classic rock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic Channel B Lead\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Channel B Lead Gain settings provide focused overdrive with clear note definition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis sound works well for classic-rock leads, power-chord rhythm playing and guitars fitted with either humbuckers or single-coil pickups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSaturated Channel B\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher Lead Gain settings introduce additional compression, distortion and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully balancing the Bass and Presence controls can produce a tight and highly defined response for heavier rhythm playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLower-Volume Driven Sounds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelecting the 5-watt or under-1-watt mode allows the channel Gain controls to be increased at a lower overall output than the full 20-watt setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStudio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Technology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve amplification with hybrid JCM900-inspired circuitry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Settings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLead Gain, Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShared Equalisation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower-Amp Tone Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePresence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Switching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront-panel switch or supplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated spring reverb with independent channel controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb Switching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter Valve\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x12-inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCelestion G12T-75\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Power Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and Return with level control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects-Loop Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable from -10dBV to +4dBu\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnfiltered preamp line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecording Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompensated line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFive 1\/4-inch jack sockets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupported Speaker Loads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω, 8Ω and 4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 510mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 460mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 255mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 17.9kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack with gold control panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower and Speaker Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C requires a suitable mains electricity connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts internal Celestion speaker operates as a 16-ohm load. The amplifier also supports approved external speaker configurations through its dedicated rear-panel outputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRequired Output\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 16Ω speaker or cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x16Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 8Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x8Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 16Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x16Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 4Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x4Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 8Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x8Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must never be operated without a suitable speaker load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a dedicated speaker cable when connecting an external cabinet. A screened guitar instrument cable is not suitable for this purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison With Other Marshall Studio Amplifiers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SN20C Studio 900\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 provides two channels, separate channel Gain and Volume controls, individual Reverb settings and a focused JCM900-inspired sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is the strongest option for players who want clean, crunch and lead tones available from one compact amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SC20C Studio Classic\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Classic is inspired by the single-channel JCM800 2203.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt has a more straightforward signal path and raw Master Volume response, while the Studio 900 offers greater channel-switching versatility, reverb and additional gain options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SV20C Studio Vintage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Vintage is based on the earlier 1959 Super Lead format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides an open Plexi-style response with bridgeable channels, while the Studio 900 offers dedicated channel switching and more saturated lead sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall ST20C Studio JTM\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio JTM offers a softer attack, fuller bass response and earlier vintage-style breakup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is tighter, brighter and more suited to aggressive rock and higher-gain styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Marshall SN20C have two channels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A covers clean to medium-drive sounds, while Channel B produces classic lead tones with additional drive and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the channels be changed with a footswitch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The included two-button footswitch controls Channel A\/B selection and switches the reverb on or off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes each channel have a separate reverb setting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A and Channel B each have an independent Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich speaker is fitted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C contains a 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 rated at 75 watts and 16 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for home use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier includes 5-watt and under-1-watt modes for more controlled playing levels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can still produce considerable volume through its 12-inch speaker, even in the lowest-power mode.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have an effects loop?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The adjustable effects loop includes Send and Return connections and supports levels ranging from floor pedals to professional rack processors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be connected directly to recording equipment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A recording-compensated output is provided for compatible recording equipment and PA systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable speaker load must remain connected whenever the amplifier is powered on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an external speaker cabinet be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The SN20C supports approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm speaker configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe total speaker load must always be connected to the correct output sockets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Studio 900 made in the UK?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Studio 900 entirely valve-driven?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C uses ECC83 preamp and phase-splitter valves with two 5881 power valves. Its JCM900-inspired hybrid architecture also incorporates solid-state components alongside the valve amplification stages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20C Studio 900 combines the clean, crunch and lead versatility of the JCM900 format with the portability and power control expected from the modern Studio range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts three output settings make it far easier to manage than a traditional high-powered JCM900, while the Celestion G12T-75 provides the tight bass, defined attack and cutting projection needed for authoritative rock tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent channel controls, footswitch operation, spring reverb, an adjustable effects loop and direct-output options make it equally capable in the rehearsal room, recording studio and on stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOffered in professionally checked Ex-Display condition, it represents an excellent opportunity to own a versatile British-made Marshall combo at a reduced price.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing Fair Deal Music means buying from a passionate team of musicians who genuinely understand the products we sell. Whether you’re purchasing your first instrument, upgrading your current setup or searching for something special, we’re here to help you make the right choice with friendly advice and expert support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trusted independent UK music retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think. We’re always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you’re looking to trade a guitar, amplifier, keyboard, drum kit, pedal or studio equipment, our team can provide a fair, no-obligation valuation and help make your next upgrade more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team or visit the Fair Deal Music Birmingham showroom to discuss your equipment and discover how much you could save.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":55633543823740,"sku":"EX-SN20C","price":1079.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/01-marshall-studio-900-combo-amp.jpg?v=1737031722"},{"product_id":"marshall-sn20c-jcm900-20w-1x12-combo-nearly-new","title":"Marshall SN20C JCM900 20W 1x12 Combo, Nearly New","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20C Studio 900 brings the powerful crunch, tightly controlled bass and assertive midrange of the celebrated JCM900 into a more compact 20-watt combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts two-channel design covers sparkling cleans, muscular classic-rock crunch and saturated lead tones, with independent Gain, Volume and Reverb controls for each channel. Shared Treble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls make it easy to shape the overall response for different guitars, rooms and playing styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSwitchable 20-watt, 5-watt and under-1-watt output settings allow the SN20C to move between rehearsals, live performances, studio sessions and lower-volume practice. A UK-made cabinet loaded with a 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 provides the focused attack, controlled bass and cutting upper-midrange closely associated with classic Marshall rock sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePresented in Nearly New condition, this is an excellent opportunity to own a versatile British-made Studio 900 combo in close-to-new cosmetic and operational condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/5I10kQUCbi8?si=vATncnOEweOWOVdk\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20C Studio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve guitar combo amplifier\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNearly New\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Modes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean to medium drive and crunch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic lead to higher-gain sustain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x12-inch Celestion G12T-75\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 watts at 16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in, independently adjustable per channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, with adjustable operating level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect and recording-compensated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootswitchable Functions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel selection and reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClassic JCM900 versatility in a portable Studio-format combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, hard rock, punk, alternative music, recording and gigging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkill Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate to professional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Marshall SN20C Studio 900?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic JCM900 Character in a Compact Format\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is inspired by Marshall’s celebrated two-channel JCM900 amplifiers, compressing their recognisable clarity, aggressive crunch and cutting lead voice into a portable 20-watt platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier delivers the fast attack and focused bass needed for defined rhythm playing, while its assertive midrange helps the guitar remain present within a full band mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is capable of moving from bright cleans and responsive edge-of-breakup sounds to saturated rock tones without relying entirely on external gain pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo Independently Controlled Channels\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C provides two distinct channels with separate Gain, Volume and Reverb controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows each channel to be configured for a different role and switched during a performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel A\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A covers the cleaner and lower-gain side of the amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Gain settings provide clear, articulate sounds suitable for clean rhythm work, modulation effects and pedal-based rigs. Increasing the control introduces medium drive and crunchy British overdrive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A works particularly well for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClean rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndie and alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClassic-rock crunch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEdge-of-breakup sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrive and fuzz pedals\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eChannel B\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B provides the amplifier’s more saturated lead voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower settings produce classic rock lead tones, while increasing Lead Gain adds further drive, compression and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B is particularly effective for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHard-rock rhythm playing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeavy alternative music\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh-gain lead sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSustained solos\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAggressive power-chord work\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe channels can be selected from the front panel or changed using the supplied footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e20W, 5W and Under-1W Output Settings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA three-position rear-panel power selector lets the amplifier operate at 20 watts, 5 watts or less than 1 watt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e20-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full-power setting provides the greatest headroom, bass authority and projection. It is ideal for rehearsals, live performances and louder recording sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e5-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 5-watt setting reduces the overall output while retaining greater body and projection than the lowest-power mode. It is useful for studio work, smaller rehearsals and more controlled playing environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eUnder-1-Watt Mode\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lowest setting makes the amplifier considerably easier to manage for home practice and close-miked recording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEven at under 1 watt, the Celestion speaker can still produce useful volume, but the reduced output allows the gain controls to be explored without the level of a full-powered stage amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCelestion G12T-75 Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C is fitted with a 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 rated at 75 watts and 16 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe G12T-75 is known for its firm bass, slightly restrained midrange and clear, cutting top end. This makes it well suited to the Studio 900’s focused rock character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe speaker provides:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControlled low frequencies\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClear palm-muted attack\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrong projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDefined high-gain rhythm sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting lead presence\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSufficient power handling for the amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts 1x12 configuration keeps the combo manageable while retaining the familiar feel and projection of a full-sized guitar speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIndependent Reverb for Each Channel\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth channels have their own Reverb level control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes it possible to use a restrained ambience on one channel and a more spacious effect on the other. For example, Channel A can be configured with subtle depth for clean rhythm playing while Channel B uses additional reverb for lead sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe reverb can also be switched on and off remotely using the supplied footswitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShared Four-Band Tone Shaping\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass controls shape the preamp response of both channels, while Presence adjusts the upper-frequency character of the power section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eTreble\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls upper-frequency clarity and attack. Higher settings create a brighter and more cutting sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eMiddle\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShapes the core voice of the guitar. Lower settings produce a more scooped response, while higher settings add thickness and projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eBass\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eControls low-frequency weight and depth. It can be reduced for tighter high-gain rhythm sounds or increased for fuller clean and crunch tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003ePresence\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdds bite and immediacy within the power-amplifier response. It is especially useful for balancing the amplifier with different rooms and speaker arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAdjustable Effects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rear-panel effects loop includes Send and Return connections plus a continuously adjustable level control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe loop level ranges from approximately -10dBV to +4dBu, allowing it to accommodate both conventional floor pedals and professional rack equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower settings suit many stompboxes, while higher settings are intended for rack processors and line-level devices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe loop is particularly useful for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChorus\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePhaser\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlanger\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTremolo\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRack processors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMulti-effects units\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlacing time-based effects after the preamp can help them remain clearer when Channel B is producing heavier distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDirect and Recording-Compensated Outputs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C provides two line-output options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eDirect Line Output\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Direct output supplies an unfiltered preamp signal for connection to compatible external equipment, such as another power amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eRecording-Compensated Output\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe compensated output applies filtering designed for direct connection to suitable recording equipment or a PA system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese connections add useful flexibility for home recording, studio sessions and live sound reinforcement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must still operate with a suitable speaker load when either line output is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExternal Speaker Connectivity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFive speaker-output sockets support approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm cabinet configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the internal speaker to be supplemented or the amplifier section to be used with compatible external cabinets, providing additional projection or a different speaker character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe correct output connection must always be selected for the total speaker load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt in Bletchley, England\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s factory in Bletchley, England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt combines the established visual identity and sound of a professional Marshall amplifier with a compact Studio-format enclosure measuring approximately 505mm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a 20W 1x12 Valve Combo?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 20-watt valve combo provides an effective balance between portability, stage capability and manageable output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnlike a separate head-and-cabinet arrangement, the combo contains the amplifier and speaker within one enclosure. This reduces the number of items that need to be transported and connected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C’s three power settings expand that versatility further. The amplifier can provide sufficient projection for rehearsals and live use at 20 watts, while the reduced modes make it practical for recording and home playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1x12 format delivers greater low-frequency depth and room-filling sound than many compact practice amplifiers without the size and weight of a 2x12 or 4x12 system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRock and Hard-Rock Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe focused bass, assertive midrange and biting upper frequencies make the SN20C ideally suited to rhythm crunch and lead sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B provides sufficient saturation for heavier playing without requiring a separate distortion pedal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAlternative and Punk Players\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe immediate attack and direct response work particularly well for energetic rhythm playing, power chords and aggressive live performances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGigging Musicians\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe full 20-watt setting provides useful stage projection, while the compact combo format makes it easier to transport than a full-sized JCM900 head and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplied footswitch allows the player to change channels and control the reverb during a performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecording Guitarists\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe reduced-power modes, effects loop and recording-compensated output make the SN20C highly practical in a studio.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts two channels provide several distinct tones without needing to change amplifiers between takes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHome Players Seeking Professional Tone\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe under-1-watt mode makes the Studio 900 more manageable in a domestic environment than a traditional 50-watt or 100-watt JCM900.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt remains capable of significant volume, but its power reduction provides far greater control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal Users\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A provides a strong foundation for boost, drive, fuzz and modulation pedals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDelay, reverb and modulation effects can also be placed in the adjustable effects loop when greater clarity is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNearly New\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis amplifier presents in close-to-new condition and shows minimal evidence of handling or use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt has been checked by the Fair Deal Music team to confirm correct operation and offers the same core performance and specifications as a new SN20C.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat’s Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall SN20C Studio 900 1x12 combo amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall two-button footswitch\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDetachable mains power cable\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eManufacturer documentation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNearly New condition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMinimal evidence of previous handling or use\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFully checked for correct operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier has been inspected and tested by the Fair Deal Music team.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur assessment includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel A operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChannel B operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFront-panel channel selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitch channel selection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGain and Lead Gain controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent channel volumes\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent channel reverb controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFootswitchable reverb\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreble, Middle, Bass and Presence controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e20-watt, 5-watt and under-1-watt modes\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop Send and Return\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEffects-loop level control\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDirect line output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecording-compensated output\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInternal Celestion speaker\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExternal speaker outputs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePower and standby functions\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eValve operation\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChecks for unwanted noise or intermittent controls\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderstanding the Studio 900 Sound\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClean Channel A\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet Channel A Gain low and raise its Volume control for a bright, articulate clean tone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis setting works well with single-coil pickups, modulation pedals and time-based effects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eChannel A Crunch\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIncreasing Channel A Gain introduces progressively more drive and compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis creates a responsive rhythm sound suitable for blues, indie, punk and classic rock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClassic Channel B Lead\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLower Channel B Lead Gain settings produce the cutting, focused overdrive associated with traditional rock lead playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis response retains strong note definition and works well with both humbuckers and single-coil pickups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSaturated Channel B\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigher Lead Gain settings add compression, distortion and sustain for heavier rhythm playing and expressive solos.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReducing the Bass control and balancing the Presence can help create a particularly tight, focused response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLower-Volume Driven Sounds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelect the 5-watt or under-1-watt setting and increase the relevant channel’s gain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis allows the amplifier’s distortion character to be explored at a lower overall output than the full 20-watt mode.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMarshall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSN20C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStudio 900\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Technology\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve amplifier with hybrid JCM900-derived circuitry\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduced-Power Settings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 watts and under 1 watt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel A Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel B Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLead Gain, Volume and Reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShared Equalisation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreble, Middle and Bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower-Amp Tone Control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePresence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannel Switching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront-panel switch or supplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb Switching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupplied footswitch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePhase Splitter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne ECC83\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 5881\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x12-inch\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Model\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCelestion G12T-75\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Impedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Power Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 watts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSend and Return with level control\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects-Loop Level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable from -10dBV to +4dBu\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirect Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnfiltered preamp line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecording Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompensated line output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFive 1\/4-inch jack sockets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupported Speaker Loads\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω, 8Ω and 4Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 505mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 463mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 249mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 18kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack with gold control panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of Manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower and Speaker Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SN20C requires a suitable mains electricity connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts internal Celestion speaker is connected as a 16-ohm load. The amplifier also supports approved external speaker configurations through its dedicated rear-panel outputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSafe connection options include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpeaker Configuration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRequired Output\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 16Ω speaker or cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x16Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 8Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x8Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 16Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x16Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 4Ω cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOne 1x4Ω output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo 8Ω cabinets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoth 2x8Ω outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must not be operated without a suitable speaker load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a dedicated speaker cable for external cabinet connections. A standard screened guitar cable is not suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eComparison With Other Marshall Studio Amplifiers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SN20C Studio 900\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 offers two channels, separate Gain and Volume controls, independent channel reverb and a focused JCM900-inspired sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is an excellent choice for players who need clean, crunch and lead tones available from one amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SC20C Studio Classic\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Classic is inspired by the single-channel JCM800 2203.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt offers a more straightforward control layout and a raw, aggressive Master Volume response, while the Studio 900 provides greater channel-switching versatility and additional gain options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall SV20C Studio Vintage\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio Vintage is based on the earlier 1959 Super Lead format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt provides an open, dynamic Plexi-style response with bridgeable channels, while the Studio 900 offers dedicated channel switching, higher-gain lead sounds and independent reverb settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMarshall ST20C Studio JTM\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio JTM has a softer attack, rounder bass and earlier vintage-style breakup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Studio 900 is tighter, brighter and better suited to aggressive rock and higher-gain styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Marshall SN20C have two channels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A covers clean to medium-drive sounds, while Channel B provides classic lead tones and greater gain and sustain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the channels be changed with a footswitch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The supplied two-button footswitch controls Channel A\/B selection and switches the reverb on or off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes each channel have its own reverb setting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Channel A and Channel B each have an independent Reverb control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat speaker is fitted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo contains one 12-inch Celestion G12T-75 rated at 75 watts and 16 ohms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for home use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The rear-panel power selector provides 5-watt and under-1-watt modes in addition to the full 20-watt setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier can still produce considerable volume, particularly through its efficient 12-inch speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have an effects loop?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The loop includes Send and Return connections plus an adjustable operating level covering pedal and professional rack-equipment signals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be connected directly to recording equipment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A recording-compensated output is provided for compatible recording equipment and PA systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier must still operate with a suitable speaker load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an external cabinet be connected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The SN20C provides outputs for approved 16-ohm, 8-ohm and 4-ohm configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe total load must be connected to the correct output sockets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Studio 900 made in the UK?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is designed, engineered and manufactured at Marshall’s Bletchley factory in England.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Studio 900 an all-valve amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier uses ECC83 preamp and phase-splitter valves with a pair of 5881 power valves. Its JCM900-derived design also incorporates solid-state elements, giving it a hybrid signal architecture alongside its valve amplification stages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Marshall SN20C Studio 900 is an exceptionally versatile addition to the Studio range, bringing the clean, crunch and lead flexibility of the two-channel JCM900 format into a portable British-made combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts three power settings make it significantly easier to use than a traditional high-powered JCM900, while the Celestion G12T-75 delivers the tight bass, clear attack and cutting projection that suit the amplifier’s focused rock voice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndependent channel gain, volume and reverb controls, footswitch operation, an adjustable effects loop and two line outputs make this far more than a simple low-powered reissue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePresented in Nearly New condition, it is an outstanding choice for players seeking unmistakable 1990s Marshall character with modern studio and stage practicality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoosing Fair Deal Music means buying from a passionate team of musicians who genuinely understand the products we sell. Whether you’re purchasing your first instrument, upgrading your current setup or searching for something special, we’re here to help you make the right choice with friendly advice and expert support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA trusted independent UK music retailer with decades of experience\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think. We’re always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you’re looking to trade a guitar, amplifier, keyboard, drum kit, pedal or studio equipment, our team can provide a fair, no-obligation valuation and help make your next upgrade more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContact our team or visit the Fair Deal Music Birmingham showroom to discuss your equipment and discover how much you could save.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56027249738108,"sku":"SN20C","price":965.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/01-marshall-studio-900-combo-amp.jpg?v=1737031722"},{"product_id":"b-stock-orange-bass-butler-preamp-pedal","title":"Orange Bass Butler Bi-Amp Bass Preamp Pedal – B-Stock","description":"\u003ch2\u003eQuick Product Summary\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Bass Butler\u003c\/strong\u003e is a powerful bi-amp bass preamp pedal designed to give bassists the huge sound and routing flexibility of a multi-amplifier setup without carrying an entire backline.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRather than simply blending clean signal into a distortion pedal, the Bass Butler splits your bass into \u003cstrong\u003etwo separate parallel analogue signal paths\u003c\/strong\u003e. One handles the full-range clean bass sound, complete with EQ and compression, while the second uses a guitar-style preamp to add aggressive distortion, mids and upper-frequency character. The two can then be combined for a sound that retains solid low-end definition while adding as much grit and attack as you need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSeparate cabinet-simulated XLR outputs for the Clean and Dirty paths make the Bass Butler particularly useful for live sound and recording, while its standard blended output allows it to integrate into a conventional bass amplifier or pedalboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis individual unit is offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving bassists a strong opportunity to add an unusually capable Orange preamp and DI solution to their rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rjJvRguodhw?si=_Wz36dCguVe-2Rx9\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBass Butler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBi-amp bass preamp pedal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSignal Concept\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eParallel Clean and Dirty signal paths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean Path\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull-range bass preamp with EQ and compression\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty Path\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuitar-style gain preamp with 3-band EQ\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDI Outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeparate balanced XLR Clean and Dirty outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Simulation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDedicated bass and guitar CabSim on XLR outputs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlended ¼\" output without CabSim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpression Input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGround Lift\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean low-end definition and aggressive distortion simultaneously\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, metal, alternative, punk, studio recording and direct live rigs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eB-Stock Condition Report\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition Classification: B-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Orange Bass Butler is being offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than standard new stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic blemish, packaging variation or other reason for the B-Stock classification has been supplied for this individual pedal, so no condition details have been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor further information about the appearance of this particular unit, our team can provide additional guidance before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange Bass Butler Bi-Amp Bass Preamp Pedal\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ No Additional Accessories Confirmed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly items specifically confirmed for this individual B-Stock unit are stated above.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis pedal is classified as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic damage, faults, repairs or modifications have been supplied for this example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eB-Stock effects and preamp equipment is checked by Fair Deal Music before leaving us to make sure it is operating correctly for its intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the Bass Butler, our assessment focuses on the pedal's main signal path, controls, switching and output functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThat gives you the reassurance of buying specialist bass equipment from an experienced independent music retailer with musicians available to help with pedalboard integration, amplification and live-routing questions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose The Orange Bass Butler?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProper Parallel Bi-Amp Architecture\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bass Butler's biggest advantage is that the clean and distorted sounds run \u003cstrong\u003ein parallel rather than one simply replacing the other\u003c\/strong\u003e. Your fundamental bass tone can remain deep and controlled while the second path supplies the aggression, harmonic content and upper-mid cut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKeep The Low End When Adding Distortion\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeavy bass distortion can sometimes sacrifice definition and low-frequency weight. By keeping a dedicated full-range clean signal running alongside the dirty channel, the Bass Butler lets you add substantial gain without abandoning the foundation of your bass sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt-In Compression On The Clean Side\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe clean bass path includes compression to help control peaks and keep your low end consistent. This is useful for aggressive pick playing, slap bass and live situations where maintaining an even signal can make the instrument easier to place in the mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGuitar-Style Dirty Channel\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRather than using a conventional full-range bass distortion circuit, Orange approaches the Dirty path more like a guitar amplifier. This emphasises the frequencies that create aggression and definition while the separate bass channel takes care of the fundamental low end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSeparate CabSim XLR Outputs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Clean and Dirty signal paths each have their own \u003cstrong\u003ebalanced XLR output with dedicated cabinet simulation\u003c\/strong\u003e. This allows a sound engineer or recording setup to receive the two parts separately and balance them independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFlexible Conventional Amp Output\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou are not restricted to a direct-to-PA setup. The blended ¼-inch output can feed a conventional bass amplifier, allowing the Bass Butler to function as the centrepiece of a traditional pedalboard and amp rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrange Bass Butler Compared With Popular Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Bass Butler vs Tech 21 SansAmp Bass Driver DI\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SansAmp approach is ideal for players who want traditional amp-style bass preamp shaping, drive and DI functionality from one compact box. The Bass Butler is better suited to players specifically attracted to \u003cstrong\u003eparallel bi-amping\u003c\/strong\u003e, where a clean low-end signal and a heavily driven second path remain separately controllable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Bass Butler vs Darkglass Microtubes X Ultra\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth are aimed at bassists who want aggressive drive without sacrificing low-frequency definition. The Darkglass takes a more modern frequency-splitting approach, while the Bass Butler recreates the broader concept of running separate bass and guitar-style preamp paths in parallel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Bass Butler vs MXR M80 Bass DI+\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe MXR is a straightforward bass preamp, DI and distortion solution with a compact conventional layout. The Bass Butler offers a more elaborate routing system for players who want separate Clean and Dirty XLR feeds and a sound closer to a dedicated dual-amp setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Bass Butler vs Separate Bass Preamp And Distortion Pedals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing several pedals gives you freedom to choose every component individually, but it also requires more connections, more pedalboard space and careful signal blending. The Bass Butler packages the fundamental clean-plus-dirty bi-amp concept into one purpose-designed unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is The Orange Bass Butler For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bass Butler is particularly well suited to bassists who want \u003cstrong\u003eheavy or aggressive drive without losing the weight and definition of their clean sound\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a strong choice for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRock and hard-rock bassists\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMetal players using heavily distorted bass tones\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk and alternative musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick players who want extra attack and upper-mid aggression\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBassists using direct-to-PA live rigs\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRecording musicians wanting separate clean and dirty tracks\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers looking to reduce the size of a traditional bi-amped setup\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBassists who need flexible DI and amplifier routing\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMusicians looking for a preamp that can become the centre of a pedalboard\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for advice on choosing the right bass preamp, DI box, distortion pedal or live bass setup? Our experienced team of musicians can help by phone, online or in-store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSuitable Genres And Uses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRock and hard rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e Combining a solid clean foundation with a driven upper-frequency path produces the weight and aggression required for dense guitar-based mixes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMetal:\u003c\/strong\u003e The ability to retain clean lows while applying substantial distortion makes the Bass Butler particularly relevant to heavier bass styles where clarity can easily disappear under high gain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePunk and alternative:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Dirty channel can add edge and attack while the Clean path keeps the fundamental notes solid underneath fast pick playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStudio recording:\u003c\/strong\u003e Separate Clean and Dirty XLR feeds give an engineer considerably more flexibility than committing to one blended bass sound during tracking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDirect live rigs:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Bass Butler can form the heart of a setup designed to feed front-of-house without requiring a large traditional bass backline.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is Bi-Amping For Bass?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTraditional \u003cstrong\u003ebi-amping\u003c\/strong\u003e involves dividing the bass signal between two different amplification paths. One can concentrate on producing deep, powerful clean lows while another provides mids, treble, distortion or a contrasting amplifier character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Bass Butler packages that concept into a single pedal. Instead of transporting two amps and splitting the instrument between them, the pedal creates two parallel preamp paths internally. The result is particularly useful when you want aggressive bass distortion that still retains a strong, clean fundamental underneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStory \u0026amp; Context\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBi-amped bass rigs have long appealed to players who want the weight of a clean bass amplifier combined with the aggression of a driven guitar-style setup. The drawback has traditionally been the amount of equipment required to achieve it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange developed the \u003cstrong\u003eBass Butler\u003c\/strong\u003e around that problem. Instead of treating it as another conventional bass overdrive pedal, the design recreates the core idea of a large parallel rig inside a compact floor unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThat makes the Bass Butler particularly relevant to modern live and studio setups, where separate DI feeds and compact equipment can offer much of the control of a large backline without requiring multiple amplifiers on stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatibility \u0026amp; Recommended Pairings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBass Amplifiers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe blended ¼-inch output can feed a conventional bass amplifier, allowing the Bass Butler to work as a preamp and drive section ahead of your existing rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePA Systems And Mixing Desks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe two balanced XLR outputs make it possible to send the Clean and Dirty paths independently to compatible live-sound equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAudio Interfaces\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor recording, the separate outputs allow the clean foundation and distorted character to be captured independently, giving you greater control when mixing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExpression Pedal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dedicated ¼-inch expression connection provides additional real-time control when used with a compatible expression pedal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther Effects\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompression, modulation, octave and ambience effects can still be incorporated into a wider pedalboard setup depending on the signal chain you want to build.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOrange Bass Butler\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBi-amp bass preamp pedal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSignal Architecture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eParallel Clean and Dirty analogue signal paths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean Path\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull-range bass preamp\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean Processing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEQ and compression\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty Path\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuitar-style gain preamp\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty EQ\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBass, Middle and Treble\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean XLR Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBalanced with bass cabinet simulation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty XLR Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBalanced with guitar cabinet simulation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlended ¼\" jack, no cabinet simulation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstrument Input\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e¼\" jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpression Connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e¼\" jack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGround Lift\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Requirement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17 x 8.5 x 16.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.29kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecification Note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact serial number, production date and specific reason for this unit's B-Stock classification have not been supplied and have therefore not been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Bass Butler requires an 18V power supply\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn external power supply has not been confirmed as included with this individual B-Stock example, so it is not listed in the What's Included section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways use a power supply that meets Orange's specified requirements for the Bass Butler rather than assuming that a standard 9V pedal supply is suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Bass Butler\u003c\/strong\u003e is much more ambitious than a conventional bass distortion pedal. Its strongest feature is the ability to maintain a powerful clean foundation while creating a completely separate driven signal alongside it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor rock and metal players in particular, that solves one of the biggest problems with bass distortion: getting enough aggression to compete with heavy guitars without turning the low end into an indistinct wall of gain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe separate CabSim XLR outputs make the concept equally valuable in the studio and on stage, where the engineer can control the clean and dirty components individually.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBest suited for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rock, metal, alternative and touring bassists who want aggressive drive without sacrificing low-end authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain benefit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Parallel clean and distorted signal paths preserve bass weight while adding substantial grit and attack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue proposition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Combines the roles of bass preamp, distortion system, compression, signal blender and dual DI routing unit in one rugged pedal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout feature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Separate cabinet-simulated XLR outputs for the Clean and Dirty signal paths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers usually upgrade from:\u003c\/strong\u003e Conventional bass overdrive or distortion pedals when they need greater control over low-end retention and live routing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMost commonly paired with:\u003c\/strong\u003e A quality bass amp or powered stage rig, expression pedal and complementary modulation or octave effects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Start by getting the Clean channel sounding strong on its own, then gradually introduce the Dirty path. This makes it easier to build aggression without accidentally losing the solid bass foundation underneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShowroom feedback:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Bass Butler makes the most sense for players who have previously struggled to get a heavily driven bass sound that still feels large and controlled in a full band mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you buy from Fair Deal Music, you're choosing one of the UK's most established, independent family run music retailers since 1987.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Birmingham showroom has helped generations of musicians find the right instruments, amplifiers, pedals and equipment, backed by a knowledgeable musician-led team who understand the products we sell.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned, B-Stock and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure online ordering\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA large Birmingham showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecades of experience with both new and pre-owned musical equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you're building a professional bass pedalboard, simplifying a live rig or looking for a better way to combine clean and driven bass tones, we're happy to help you choose the right setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to upgrade your guitar, bass, keyboard, amplifier, drum kit or studio gear, your existing equipment could help reduce the cost of your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply get in touch with our team for a no-obligation valuation, and we'll be happy to discuss the options available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's an easy way to unlock the value of the gear you no longer use while making your next piece of equipment even more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange Bass Butler a distortion pedal or a preamp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is best thought of as a \u003cstrong\u003ebi-amp bass preamp system\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than a conventional distortion pedal. It provides separate Clean and Dirty preamp paths, tone shaping, compression and multiple output options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the Bass Butler directly into a PA?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its balanced XLR outputs are designed for connection to compatible professional audio equipment, with separate cabinet-simulated outputs for the clean bass and dirty guitar-style paths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I record the Clean and Dirty sounds separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. This is one of the Bass Butler's major advantages. The independent XLR outputs allow the two signal paths to be captured separately so their balance can be adjusted during mixing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I still use the Bass Butler with a normal bass amp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The blended ¼-inch output allows the pedal to feed a conventional bass amplifier without cabinet simulation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Bass Butler suitable for clean bass sounds?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Clean channel is an important part of the design rather than simply a dry blend control. It provides full-range bass processing with EQ and compression.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for five-string bass?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The full-range Clean path makes the Bass Butler a strong option for extended-range instruments where retaining fundamental low-frequency definition is particularly important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWould the Bass Butler suit lighter styles as well as metal?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Although its parallel distortion architecture is especially attractive for rock and heavier music, the Clean channel, compression and routing options can also be useful for funk, pop, alternative and general live or recording work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy would I use two XLR outputs instead of one blended signal?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSending the Clean and Dirty paths separately gives the engineer independent control over their level and processing. That can make it easier to retain deep bass definition while adjusting how prominent the distorted element is in the final mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal Buying Advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock Orange Bass Butler\u003c\/strong\u003e is an excellent choice for bassists who want far more control than a conventional drive pedal can provide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts parallel clean and dirty architecture allows you to build a huge driven bass sound while protecting the low-end foundation that makes the instrument work in a band. Add compression, independent EQ, separate CabSim XLR outputs and flexible amplifier routing, and it becomes a serious live and studio tool rather than simply another effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor players interested in bi-amped bass sounds without transporting a complicated multi-amplifier rig, the Bass Butler offers a remarkably practical solution.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Orange","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56239584936316,"sku":"BASS-BUTLER-B","price":249.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/bassb1.jpg?v=1768566731"},{"product_id":"b-stock-orange-o-bass-off-black","title":"Orange O Bass Off-Black 4-String Bass Guitar – B-Stock","description":"\u003ch2\u003eQuick Product Summary\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange O Bass in Off-Black\u003c\/strong\u003e is a distinctive 4-string electric bass that combines retro styling, straightforward passive electronics and a characterful split-coil sound with an offset body shape that stands apart from more conventional bass designs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned in-house by Orange, the O Bass uses an \u003cstrong\u003eokoumé body, bolt-on maple neck, purpleheart fingerboard and full 34-inch scale\u003c\/strong\u003e. Its custom-wound split-coil pickup sits closer to the bridge than the position found on a traditional Precision-style bass, producing a tighter low end with extra midrange definition and attack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith just \u003cstrong\u003eMaster Volume and Master Tone controls\u003c\/strong\u003e, the O Bass keeps things refreshingly simple. Roll the tone back for warmer soul, blues and vintage-style bass sounds, or open it up for the more aggressive definition suited to rock, indie, punk and heavier music.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis individual instrument is offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e, providing a strong opportunity for players looking for an unusual Orange bass at an alternative to standard new-stock pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/fa3-wzCJjhg?si=CC2FlxCfmulDwwWp\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eO Bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOff-Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConfiguration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-string electric bass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOkoumé\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNeck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaple, bolt-on\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFingerboard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePurpleheart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e34\" \/ 864mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePickup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCustom-wound split-coil\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectronics\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSimple passive layout with distinctive bridge-shifted split-coil character\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, indie, punk, blues, soul, alternative and recording\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eB-Stock Condition Report\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition Classification: B-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Orange O Bass is being offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than standard new stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic blemish, packaging variation or other reason for the B-Stock classification has been supplied for this individual instrument, so no condition details have been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor further information about the cosmetic condition of this particular bass, our team can provide additional guidance before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange O Bass Off-Black 4-String Bass Guitar\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ No Additional Accessories Confirmed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly items specifically confirmed for this individual B-Stock instrument are stated above.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis instrument is classified as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic damage, repairs or modifications have been supplied for this example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery B-Stock bass is checked before leaving Fair Deal Music to make sure it is operating correctly and ready for its next player.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor an instrument such as the Orange O Bass, our assessment covers the key areas of playability and operation, including the neck, frets, hardware, controls, pickup output and general functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis means you're buying from a specialist music retailer with experienced musicians available to help with questions about the bass, amplification, accessories and future upgrades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eService \/ Setup Work\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Orange O Bass will be \u003cstrong\u003echecked and set up before leaving Fair Deal Music\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur team checks the instrument's general playability, tuning stability and setup so it leaves us performing as it should.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs with any guitar or bass sent by courier, small setup changes can occur during transport because wood naturally responds to changes in \u003cstrong\u003etemperature and humidity\u003c\/strong\u003e. Minor personal adjustment may therefore be beneficial after the instrument has acclimatised to its new environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose The Orange O Bass?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eA Bass With Its Own Identity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe O Bass takes inspiration from classic single-pickup instruments without simply copying them. Its offset body, distinctive Orange styling and deliberately repositioned pickup give it an identity and sound of its own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCustom Split-Coil Pickup Position\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange places the custom-wound split-coil pickup slightly closer to the bridge than you would find on a conventional Precision-style layout. This creates a more focused low end with prominent mids and extra definition, particularly useful when playing through distortion, fuzz or a busy band mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSimple Passive Electronics\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne pickup, one Volume and one Tone control mean there is very little standing between you and the instrument. The passive circuit also responds naturally to playing dynamics without requiring batteries or complicated switching.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eComfortable Full-Scale Design\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA \u003cstrong\u003e34-inch scale\u003c\/strong\u003e provides familiar long-scale bass string tension, while the offset okoumé body and slim satin-finished maple neck make the O Bass a comfortable option for rehearsals, recording sessions and live use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrange O Bass Compared With Popular Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange O Bass vs Traditional Precision-Style Bass\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA traditional Precision-style bass is the obvious choice if you want the familiar benchmark split-coil sound and conventional body shape. The O Bass takes that basic concept in a different direction, with a more unusual offset design and pickup placement intended to produce additional attack and midrange focus.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange O Bass vs Jazz-Style Bass\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA Jazz-style bass generally gives you two pickups and more blending options. The O Bass is deliberately simpler, making it better suited to players who prefer one strong fundamental sound that can be shaped quickly with playing dynamics and the Tone control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange O Bass vs Orange Glenn Hughes O Bass\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Glenn Hughes edition takes the basic O Bass concept further with its distinctive Deep Purple-inspired appearance and upgraded Seymour Duncan SPB-1 pickup. The standard Off-Black O Bass is the more understated and accessible option while retaining the fundamental Orange design and playing experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange O Bass vs Short-Scale Bass\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA short-scale bass generally provides softer string tension and a more compact playing feel. The O Bass retains a conventional 34-inch long scale, making it better suited to players who want familiar full-scale tension, low-end response and tuning stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is The Orange O Bass For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe O Bass is a particularly strong choice for players who like \u003cstrong\u003esimple passive basses but want something visually and tonally different from the usual designs\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is well suited to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRock and alternative bassists\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIndie players wanting distinctive stage styling\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePunk players who favour direct, attacking bass sounds\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues and soul players using warmer Tone settings\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePick players looking for strong note definition\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFingerstyle bassists wanting a responsive passive instrument\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitarists moving into bass\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers who prefer simple one-pickup instruments\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBassists looking for something less conventional than another P- or J-style instrument\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for advice on choosing the right bass guitar, bass amplifier or first upgrade? Our experienced team of musicians can help by phone, online or in-store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSuitable Genres And Playing Styles\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRock and hard rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The O Bass's defined midrange helps bass lines remain audible among distorted electric guitars, while its passive electronics keep the fundamental sound direct and responsive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePunk and indie:\u003c\/strong\u003e Pick playing works particularly well with the more forward pickup position, bringing attack and definition to fast rhythm parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSoul and blues:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rolling back the Tone control softens the high end and produces a rounder response suitable for warmer fingerstyle playing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAlternative and heavier styles:\u003c\/strong\u003e The controlled low end and pronounced mids work particularly well with fuzz and bass overdrive, where an overly soft fundamental can disappear in a dense mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRecording:\u003c\/strong\u003e The uncomplicated passive signal provides engineers with a solid starting point that can be shaped further through amplification, pedals or studio processing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Does The O Bass Pickup Sit Closer To The Bridge?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoving a pickup towards the bridge changes which part of the vibrating string it hears. Compared with a split-coil positioned further towards the neck, the result generally has \u003cstrong\u003eless loose low-end bloom and greater midrange attack and definition\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange deliberately uses this positioning to give the O Bass its own voice rather than creating another conventional Precision-style instrument. It is particularly useful for players who need bass notes to remain articulate when guitars, drums and other instruments are competing for space in the mix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStory \u0026amp; Context\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange O Bass\u003c\/strong\u003e grew from Orange's own amplifier-design heritage rather than being created as a generic instrument carrying the company logo. The original design was conceived under Orange Technical Director and Lead Designer \u003cstrong\u003eAdrian Emsley\u003c\/strong\u003e, whose interest in vintage instruments helped shape the bass's retro-influenced appearance and stripped-back electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe concept was deliberately straightforward: a full-scale, passive bass with one split-coil pickup and enough individual character to avoid simply reproducing an established American design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange subsequently developed the O Bass family further, including the Glenn Hughes edition, but the standard O Bass remains the clearest expression of the original idea — an uncomplicated, distinctive bass designed to deliver useful sounds without unnecessary controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatibility \u0026amp; Recommended Pairings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBass Amplifiers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe O Bass can be connected to any conventional bass amplifier with a standard instrument input. Its passive output makes it compatible with everything from compact home-practice combos to professional bass heads and cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eEffects Pedals\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFuzz, overdrive, compression, octave and modulation pedals can all be used normally. The focused midrange character of the pickup can make the O Bass particularly effective with drive and fuzz effects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eStrings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard specification uses a \u003cstrong\u003e.045–.105 gauge\u003c\/strong\u003e set, a common long-scale bass gauge that provides a useful balance between tension and playability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlternative gauges can be fitted, although a setup adjustment may be required after a substantial change in string gauge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOrange O Bass Off-Black\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-string electric bass guitar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBolt-on\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOkoumé\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNeck\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaple\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNeck Finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSatin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTruss Rod\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDual action\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFingerboard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePurpleheart\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScale Length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e864mm \/ 34\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFingerboard Radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNut Width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e43mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePickup\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x Orange custom-wound split-coil\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectronics\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePassive\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eControls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaster Volume, Master Tone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBridge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNickel top-loading 4-saddle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTuners\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen gear\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard String Gauge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e.045–.105\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturer Listed Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.77kg \/ 8.31lb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOff-Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecification Note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact production date, serial number, individual instrument weight and specific reason for this bass's B-Stock classification have not been supplied and have therefore not been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange O Bass uses passive electronics\u003c\/strong\u003e, so \u003cstrong\u003eno battery is required\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply connect the bass to a bass amplifier, audio interface, DI box or suitable effects setup using a standard \u003cstrong\u003e¼-inch instrument cable\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis simplicity is one of the advantages of a passive bass: there is no onboard battery to monitor or replace.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange O Bass Off-Black\u003c\/strong\u003e is easy to recommend to players who like the directness of a classic single-pickup passive bass but want something considerably less predictable in appearance and character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bridge-shifted split-coil pickup gives it enough midrange personality to distinguish it from a conventional P-style instrument, while the full 34-inch scale, straightforward controls and lightweight offset design make it practical rather than simply unusual.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a B-Stock instrument, this example is particularly appealing for a player who prioritises sound, playability and value over receiving a standard new-stock example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBest suited for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rock, indie, alternative and punk bassists looking for a simple passive instrument with character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain benefit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Immediate, usable bass tones from an uncomplicated one-pickup design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue proposition:\u003c\/strong\u003e A distinctive alternative to the huge number of conventional P- and J-inspired basses at this level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout feature:\u003c\/strong\u003e The custom split-coil pickup positioned closer to the bridge for additional midrange definition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers usually upgrade from:\u003c\/strong\u003e Entry-level bass packages and basic beginner instruments when they want better hardware, a full-scale playing experience and a more individual sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMost commonly paired with:\u003c\/strong\u003e A quality bass combo or head-and-cab rig, compression, overdrive or fuzz pedals and a dependable instrument cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Don't underestimate the Tone control. Fully open gives the O Bass its more aggressive edge, but rolling it back transforms the response considerably and opens up warmer blues, soul and vintage-style sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShowroom feedback:\u003c\/strong\u003e The O Bass is particularly appealing to players who want something different without having to learn a complicated control system. It looks unusual, but the actual playing experience is reassuringly straightforward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you buy from Fair Deal Music, you're choosing one of the UK's most established, independent family run music retailers since 1987.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Birmingham showroom has helped generations of musicians find the right instruments, amplifiers and equipment, backed by a knowledgeable musician-led team who understand the products we sell.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned, B-Stock and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure online ordering\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA large Birmingham showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecades of experience with both new and pre-owned musical equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you're choosing your first bass, moving up from a starter instrument or looking for something more distinctive to add to your collection, we're happy to help you make the right choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to upgrade your guitar, bass, keyboard, amplifier, drum kit or studio gear, your existing equipment could help reduce the cost of your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply get in touch with our team for a no-obligation valuation, and we'll be happy to discuss the options available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's an easy way to unlock the value of the gear you no longer use while making your next instrument even more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange O Bass suitable for beginners?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its passive electronics and simple Volume and Tone controls make it easy to understand, while the full 34-inch scale means a beginner learns on the same scale length used by many professional bass guitars.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the O Bass sound like compared with a Precision Bass?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth use the fundamental idea of a split-coil pickup, but Orange positions its pickup closer to the bridge. This gives the O Bass a tighter and more mid-focused response rather than simply recreating the traditional Precision sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange O Bass active or passive?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is passive. There is no onboard preamp or battery, making operation particularly straightforward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it good for playing with a pick?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The focused pickup position and naturally pronounced midrange make pick attack come through clearly, which works particularly well for rock, punk, indie and alternative styles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use flatwound strings on the O Bass?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Flatwounds can be fitted if you want a smoother feel and warmer fundamental sound. Changing string type or gauge can alter neck relief, action and intonation, so a setup adjustment may be beneficial afterwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a 34-inch bass difficult for a guitarist to adapt to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA full-scale bass requires a wider fretting-hand stretch than a guitar, but many guitarists adapt quickly. The O Bass's relatively streamlined neck and balanced body help make the transition comfortable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the pickup be upgraded later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe O Bass can form a good basis for future modification, but pickup dimensions and compatibility should always be checked before ordering a replacement. Players happy with the original voice may find no need to change it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of amp should I use with the O Bass?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a dedicated bass amplifier capable of reproducing low frequencies safely. The passive output works with everything from small practice combos to professional bass amplification systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal Buying Advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock Orange O Bass Off-Black\u003c\/strong\u003e is a strong choice for bassists who want something recognisably different without sacrificing the simplicity that makes classic passive bass designs so effective.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts combination of a lightweight okoumé body, full-scale maple neck, purpleheart fingerboard and unusually positioned custom split-coil pickup produces an instrument that is easy to operate but distinctive in both appearance and sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor rock, punk, indie, alternative, blues and straightforward studio work, the O Bass offers plenty of personality without unnecessary complication.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Orange","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56239805530492,"sku":"BG-O-BASS-BK-B","price":339.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/OrangeOBass_2022_blackwhite_-1.webp?v=1788009068"},{"product_id":"b-stock-orange-ppc108-speaker-cab","title":"Orange PPC108 1x8 Speaker Cab – B-Stock","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"quick-info-header flex-space-between\"\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eQuick Product Summary\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC108 1x8 Speaker Cab\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact closed-back guitar cabinet designed to partner perfectly with small-format Orange amplifier heads such as the Micro Terror and Micro Dark.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDespite its tiny footprint, the PPC108 uses a custom \u003cstrong\u003e8-inch Orange Voice of the World speaker\u003c\/strong\u003e, closed-back construction and a solid birch-ply enclosure to deliver a focused, punchy guitar sound that's ideal for home practice, portable rigs and lower-volume setups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis individual cabinet is offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e, providing a great-value route into a genuine Orange head-and-cab setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/E8xV69l432k?si=rcTneGk_oeNh-NXK\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePPC108\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClosed-back 1x8 guitar cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8\" Voice of the World\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImpedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBirch ply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGenuine Orange cabinet character in an ultra-compact format\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMicro Terror, Micro Dark, home practice and portable guitar rigs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eB-Stock Condition Report\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition Classification: B-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Orange PPC108 is being offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than standard new stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic blemish, packaging variation or other reason for the B-Stock classification has been supplied for this individual cabinet, so no condition details have been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor more information about the cosmetic condition of this particular example, our team can provide further guidance before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange PPC108 1x8 Speaker Cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ No Additional Accessories Included\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis cabinet is classified as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific marks, damage, repairs or modifications have been supplied for this individual example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eB-Stock equipment is checked by Fair Deal Music before leaving us to ensure it is suitable for its intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a speaker cabinet such as the PPC108, our assessment includes the cabinet's general physical integrity, speaker operation and connection functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose The Orange PPC108?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIdeal Partner For Orange Micro Heads\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC108 was designed specifically with compact Orange heads such as the \u003cstrong\u003eMicro Terror and Micro Dark\u003c\/strong\u003e in mind, creating a neatly proportioned miniature head-and-cab rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProper 8-Inch Guitar Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange fits the PPC108 with its own \u003cstrong\u003e8-inch Voice of the World speaker\u003c\/strong\u003e, voiced to provide the focused mids and punch required for electric guitar rather than using a generic compact speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClosed-Back Design\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sealed rear enclosure helps reinforce low-end response and keeps the sound focused, giving the PPC108 a surprisingly substantial character for its dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExceptionally Portable\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt just over 4kg and approximately 26cm square from the front, the PPC108 is extremely easy to carry, store or fit into a small home guitar setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrange PPC108 Compared With Popular Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC108 vs PPC112\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC112 is the better choice if you want the fuller low end, projection and response of a full-size 12-inch speaker. The PPC108 is significantly smaller, lighter and better suited to compact Micro-series and home-practice rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC108 vs PPC212\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212 is a professional twin-12-inch cabinet designed for substantially larger amplifier rigs and live use. The PPC108 is aimed at the opposite end of the spectrum: portability, lower-volume playing and minimum space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC108 vs A Small Practice Combo\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA practice combo combines the amplifier and speaker in one enclosure, while the PPC108 lets you build a separate head-and-cab setup. This gives you more freedom to change amplifier heads while retaining the same compact cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is The Orange PPC108 For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC108 is particularly well suited to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange Micro Terror owners\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange Micro Dark owners\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitarists building a compact desktop or home rig\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers short on storage space\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBeginners wanting a simple separate head-and-cab setup\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMusicians who need an easily portable practice cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitarists wanting genuine Orange styling on a smaller scale\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for advice on matching an Orange amplifier head with the correct guitar cabinet? Our experienced team of musicians can help by phone, online or in-store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eIs An 8-Inch Guitar Cabinet Right For You?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn \u003cstrong\u003e8-inch speaker cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e is ideal when portability, manageable volume and minimal footprint matter more than maximum low-end extension or stage projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor home practice and compact amplifier heads, the PPC108 makes excellent sense. Players moving into louder rehearsals, larger amplifiers or regular gigging will generally benefit from moving up to a 1x12 or 2x12 cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStory \u0026amp; Context\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange's compact Micro amplifier range brought the traditional separate head-and-cabinet format into a much smaller package. The PPC108 was developed as the natural speaker partner for that concept.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRather than requiring a full-size cabinet beneath a tiny Micro head, the PPC108 creates a properly scaled miniature Orange stack while retaining a closed-back enclosure and dedicated guitar speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOrange PPC108\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuitar speaker cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConfiguration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1x8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClosed back\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 x 8\" Orange Voice of the World\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImpedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBirch ply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e26 x 26 x 16.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.05kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecification Note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact production date, serial number and specific reason for this cabinet's B-Stock classification have not been supplied and have therefore not been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC108 is a passive speaker cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e, so it requires \u003cstrong\u003eno mains power, batteries or external power supply\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt must be connected to a compatible guitar amplifier's speaker output using a proper speaker cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet is rated at \u003cstrong\u003e8 ohms with 20 watts of power handling\u003c\/strong\u003e, so always check the amplifier's output impedance and power specification before connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC108\u003c\/strong\u003e does exactly what a good compact cabinet should: it gives small Orange amplifier heads a properly matched speaker enclosure without turning a portable rig into something bulky.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts combination of an 8-inch Voice of the World speaker, closed-back cabinet and extremely compact dimensions makes it particularly easy to recommend for home practice and Micro-series setups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn B-Stock form, it becomes an even more appealing choice for players who prioritise value and performance over receiving a standard new-stock example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBest suited for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Orange Micro Terror and Micro Dark owners looking for a compact practice cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain benefit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Genuine separate head-and-cab operation in an exceptionally portable package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue proposition:\u003c\/strong\u003e An affordable route into a proper Orange mini-stack setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout feature:\u003c\/strong\u003e The custom 8-inch Voice of the World speaker housed in a compact closed-back enclosure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers usually upgrade from:\u003c\/strong\u003e Small built-in practice-amp speakers or miniature desktop guitar amps.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMost commonly paired with:\u003c\/strong\u003e Orange Micro Terror or Micro Dark amplifier heads and a proper speaker cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Match the cabinet impedance carefully to your amplifier. Speaker outputs are not interchangeable with normal guitar-level connections.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShowroom feedback:\u003c\/strong\u003e The PPC108 is at its best when used for exactly what it was designed to do: creating a compact, straightforward Orange practice rig that takes up very little space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you buy from Fair Deal Music, you're choosing one of the UK's most established, independent family run music retailers since 1987.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Birmingham showroom has helped generations of musicians find the right instruments, amplifiers and equipment, backed by a knowledgeable musician-led team who understand the products we sell.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned, B-Stock and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure online ordering\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA large Birmingham showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecades of experience with both new and pre-owned musical equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to upgrade your guitar, keyboard, amplifier, drum kit or studio gear, your existing equipment could help reduce the cost of your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply get in touch with our team for a no-obligation valuation, and we'll be happy to discuss the options available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's an easy way to unlock the value of the gear you no longer use while making your next purchase even more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange PPC108 designed for the Micro Terror?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The PPC108 is specifically designed as a compact speaker cabinet for Orange Micro-series amplifier heads such as the Micro Terror and Micro Dark.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the PPC108 with another guitar amplifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can use it with a compatible amplifier providing the correct speaker output, impedance and suitable power level. Always check the amplifier specification before connecting it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the PPC108 suitable for home practice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its compact size and 8-inch speaker make home practice one of its strongest uses, particularly when space is limited.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use a normal guitar lead between the amp and PPC108?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Use a proper speaker cable between an amplifier's speaker output and the PPC108 rather than a standard instrument cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould I choose a PPC108 or PPC112?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the PPC108 if compact size, portability and use with a Micro-series head are your priorities. Choose the PPC112 if you want the greater low-end response and projection of a full-size 12-inch speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the PPC108 require mains power?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a passive cabinet and receives the amplified signal from the connected guitar amplifier head.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the PPC108 suitable for recording?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Its compact sound can be useful for recording, particularly where lower-volume amplified guitar tones are required without using a larger cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Orange","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56239964193148,"sku":"PPC-108-B","price":59.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/orange-ppc108-315413orange.jpg?v=1635159540"},{"product_id":"b-stock-orange-ppc212-closed-back-cabinet","title":"Orange PPC212 Closed Back 2x12 Guitar Cabinet – B-Stock","description":"\u003ch2\u003eQuick Product Summary\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC212 Closed Back Guitar Cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional 2x12 speaker cabinet built for players who want the punch, projection and authority associated with a larger rock rig without stepping up to a full 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLoaded with \u003cstrong\u003etwo 12-inch Celestion Vintage 30 speakers\u003c\/strong\u003e, the PPC212 combines a sealed closed-back design with substantial \u003cstrong\u003e18mm birch-ply construction\u003c\/strong\u003e to produce a focused, powerful response with strong low-end definition and excellent midrange projection. Rated at \u003cstrong\u003e120 watts and 16 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e, it pairs naturally with a wide range of compatible Orange amplifier heads and other guitar amplifiers with suitable speaker outputs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis particular cabinet is offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it an attractive option for players looking for premium Orange cabinet construction at an alternative to standard new-stock pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/fURjPvH6ZrE?si=FA3sISYfNzYbNOJy\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePPC212\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStraight-front closed-back 2x12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x 12\" Celestion Vintage 30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120W mono\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImpedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18mm birch plywood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConnections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x parallel ¼\" speaker jacks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTight, focused 2x12 projection with professional Celestion speakers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, blues, hard rock, alternative, metal, gigging and studio use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eB-Stock Condition Report\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition Classification: B-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis Orange PPC212 is being offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than standard new stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic blemish, packaging variation or other reason for the B-Stock classification has been supplied for this individual cabinet, so no condition details have been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor precise information about the appearance of this individual cabinet, our team can provide further guidance before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange PPC212 Closed Back 2x12 Guitar Speaker Cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ Amplifier head not included\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e✘ No Additional Accessories Included\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo further accessories or packaging have been confirmed for this individual B-Stock example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis cabinet is classified as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific cosmetic marks, damage, repairs or modifications have been supplied for the listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eB-Stock equipment is checked by Fair Deal Music before leaving us to make sure it is suitable for its intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a guitar speaker cabinet such as the PPC212, our assessment focuses on the cabinet's general physical integrity, speaker operation, connections and overall functionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuying B-Stock from a specialist music retailer also gives you the reassurance of dealing with a knowledgeable team who understand amplifier and cabinet matching, speaker impedance and complete guitar-rig setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose The Orange PPC212?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo Celestion Vintage 30 Speakers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212 is loaded with a pair of \u003cstrong\u003eCelestion Vintage 30s\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving it the strong midrange projection and detailed response that has made the speaker a popular choice for professional rock and high-gain guitar rigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClosed-Back Punch And Focus\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sealed cabinet design helps create a tighter, more directional response than an open-back enclosure. This is particularly useful for players who want defined low-end response, focused rhythm tones and strong projection on stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e18mm Birch-Ply Construction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange builds the PPC212 from \u003cstrong\u003e18mm birch plywood\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving the enclosure the strength and rigidity expected from a serious touring and studio cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e2x12 Performance Without A Full 4x12\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 2x12 gives you more speaker area and projection than a single 12-inch cabinet while remaining considerably easier to transport and accommodate than a conventional 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExpandable Cabinet Setup\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwin parallel speaker connections allow a second compatible \u003cstrong\u003e16-ohm cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e to be added when the connected amplifier supports the resulting 8-ohm load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrange PPC212 Compared With Popular Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212 vs PPC212 Open Back\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212 Open Back produces a broader, more room-filling spread with greater openness around clean and ambient tones. The closed-back PPC212 is better suited to players who want tighter bass, stronger forward projection and a more focused response.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212 vs PPC112\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC112 is substantially more compact and easier to move, making it ideal for smaller rigs. The PPC212 offers twice the speaker area and greater projection, making it the stronger option for players who want a larger live sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212 vs PPC212V\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212V uses a vertical format and lighter Neo Creamback speakers, making portability one of its main advantages. The standard PPC212 is the better choice for players specifically looking for the traditional Vintage 30-loaded, heavy-duty closed-back Orange cabinet experience.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange PPC212 vs PPC412\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC412 delivers the scale, speaker movement and stage presence of four Vintage 30s, but it is significantly larger and heavier. The PPC212 gives you much of the focused closed-back Orange character in a more manageable format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is The Orange PPC212 For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212 is particularly well suited to guitarists who want a \u003cstrong\u003eserious professional cabinet without committing to the size of a 4x12\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a strong choice for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGigging guitarists using separate amplifier heads\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRock and hard-rock players\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh-gain and metal guitarists\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBlues-rock players wanting strong midrange projection\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio players recording real guitar cabinets\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGuitarists upgrading from a small 1x12 enclosure\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers looking for a rugged long-term speaker cabinet\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange amplifier owners building a matched head-and-cab setup\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for advice on matching your amplifier head to the right speaker cabinet and impedance? Our experienced team of musicians can help by phone, online or in-store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSuitable Genres And Uses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRock and hard rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Vintage 30 speakers and sealed enclosure are naturally suited to thick rhythm sounds, power chords and projecting lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMetal:\u003c\/strong\u003e The closed-back construction helps keep low frequencies controlled and focused when using higher-gain amplifier settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBlues and classic rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The strong midrange character helps guitar parts remain present in a band mix without requiring excessive volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAlternative and grunge:\u003c\/strong\u003e Distortion and fuzz-driven rigs benefit from the substantial enclosure and focused 2x12 projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLive performance:\u003c\/strong\u003e The straight-front design projects strongly towards the audience while the dual-speaker format gives a larger sense of scale than a compact single-speaker cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStudio recording:\u003c\/strong\u003e Two identical Vintage 30 speakers give engineers a familiar speaker platform that is straightforward to microphone and capable of handling clean, crunch and heavily driven sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eClosed Back vs Open Back: Which Cabinet Is Right For You?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA \u003cstrong\u003eclosed-back guitar cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e generally produces a tighter, more focused response with stronger forward projection and controlled low frequencies. This makes the PPC212 particularly attractive for rock, hard rock and heavier styles where rhythm definition matters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn open-back cabinet spreads more sound around the room and can feel more spacious for clean, blues and ambient guitar sounds. Neither design is universally better, but players looking for punch, focus and classic head-and-cab authority will often prefer the closed-back PPC212.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing The Right Amplifier For The PPC212\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Orange PPC212 is rated at \u003cstrong\u003e16 ohms and 120 watts mono\u003c\/strong\u003e. Your amplifier must have a speaker output compatible with a 16-ohm load and an appropriate power output for the cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen adding a second 16-ohm cabinet through the parallel connections, the total impedance becomes \u003cstrong\u003e8 ohms\u003c\/strong\u003e. Your amplifier must support an 8-ohm speaker load before using this configuration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways connect an amplifier head to the PPC212 using a proper speaker cable rather than a standard guitar instrument lead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStory \u0026amp; Context\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange has been producing distinctive amplifier and speaker-cabinet designs since the late 1960s, with large closed-back cabinets becoming an important part of the company's visual identity and powerful British guitar sound.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePPC cabinet range\u003c\/strong\u003e continues that traditional approach with robust plywood construction, professional guitar speakers and straightforward designs intended for serious stage and studio use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212 effectively brings many of the principles associated with Orange's larger 4x12 cabinets into a more manageable two-speaker enclosure. Its combination of Vintage 30 speakers, substantial internal volume and closed-back construction explains why it remains a natural partner for many of Orange's professional amplifier heads.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatibility \u0026amp; Recommended Pairings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Amplifier Heads\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PPC212 pairs naturally with compatible Orange amplifier heads offering a suitable \u003cstrong\u003e16-ohm speaker output\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is especially effective with medium and higher-powered heads where a single 1x12 may not provide the scale or projection the player wants.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSecond Speaker Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe parallel connections allow another compatible 16-ohm cabinet to be linked, creating an 8-ohm total load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways confirm that your amplifier supports this impedance before connecting two cabinets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpeaker Cable\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA dedicated speaker cable is required between the amplifier and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use a regular guitar instrument lead for amplifier-to-speaker connections.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProtective Cover\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA suitable cabinet cover is worth considering for players regularly transporting the PPC212 between home, rehearsals, recording sessions and gigs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOrange PPC212 Closed Back\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuitar speaker cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConfiguration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2x12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStraight-front closed back\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x 12\" Celestion Vintage 30\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Handling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120W mono\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImpedance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16Ω\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18mm birch plywood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Connections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x parallel ¼\" jacks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrille\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHard-wearing woven paper grille cloth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHardware\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSkid runners\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e78 x 53 x 37.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32.65kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecification Note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact serial number, production date and specific reason for this cabinet's B-Stock classification have not been supplied and have therefore not been guessed or added.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC212 is a passive guitar speaker cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e, so it requires \u003cstrong\u003eno mains power, batteries or external power supply\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt must be connected to a compatible guitar amplifier's speaker output using a proper speaker cable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cabinet presents a \u003cstrong\u003e16-ohm load and is rated at 120 watts mono\u003c\/strong\u003e, so always check your amplifier's speaker-output impedance and power specification before connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange PPC212 Closed Back\u003c\/strong\u003e is a proper professional guitar cabinet for players who want the punch and authority of a substantial speaker enclosure without moving all the way to a 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts twin Vintage 30 speakers, rigid birch-ply construction and sealed enclosure give it a focused, muscular response that works particularly well for rock and higher-gain styles. It is not the lightest 2x12 available, but that substantial construction is part of what gives the PPC212 its appeal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn B-Stock form, it can be an especially attractive option for players who prioritise performance and build quality over receiving a standard new-stock example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBest suited for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Gigging and recording guitarists looking for a powerful closed-back 2x12 cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain benefit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Strong projection and tight low-end response without the size of a full 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue proposition:\u003c\/strong\u003e A professional-grade cabinet built around two proven Celestion Vintage 30 speakers and substantial birch-ply construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout feature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Twin Vintage 30 speakers housed in Orange's large sealed 2x12 enclosure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers usually upgrade from:\u003c\/strong\u003e Compact 1x12 cabinets and entry-level speaker enclosures when they need greater projection and stage authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMost commonly paired with:\u003c\/strong\u003e Compatible Orange amplifier heads, quality speaker cables and a protective cabinet cover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Check the impedance marking on your amplifier before connecting the PPC212. A correct speaker match is just as important as choosing the cabinet itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShowroom feedback:\u003c\/strong\u003e The PPC212 is particularly appealing to players who like the tight feel of a traditional closed-back rock cabinet but want something more manageable than a 4x12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you buy from Fair Deal Music, you're choosing one of the UK's most established, independent family run music retailers since 1987.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Birmingham showroom has helped generations of musicians find the right instruments, amplifiers and equipment, backed by a knowledgeable musician-led team who understand the products we sell.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned, B-Stock and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure online ordering\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA large Birmingham showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecades of experience with both new and pre-owned musical equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you're matching a new amp head with the right cabinet, upgrading from a 1x12 or downsizing from a 4x12, we're happy to help you choose the right setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to upgrade your guitar, keyboard, amplifier, drum kit or studio gear, your existing equipment could help reduce the cost of your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply get in touch with our team for a no-obligation valuation, and we'll be happy to discuss the options available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's an easy way to unlock the value of the gear you no longer use while making your next instrument or amplifier setup even more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat amplifier heads can I use with the Orange PPC212?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can use a guitar amplifier head with a compatible \u003cstrong\u003e16-ohm speaker output\u003c\/strong\u003e and suitable power rating. Always check the amplifier's speaker-output specifications before making the connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use two PPC212 cabinets together?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo 16-ohm cabinets connected in parallel present an 8-ohm total load. This is suitable only when your amplifier is designed to operate safely into an 8-ohm speaker load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the PPC212 suitable for high-gain guitar tones?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The combination of a closed-back enclosure and twin Celestion Vintage 30 speakers makes it particularly well suited to rock, hard rock and high-gain styles requiring focused low end and strong midrange projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the PPC212 good for recording?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Vintage 30 speakers are familiar to many recording engineers, and the closed-back cabinet provides a controlled, focused sound that works well with conventional close-miking techniques.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a 2x12 loud enough for live use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor many professional guitar rigs, absolutely. The perceived volume depends on the connected amplifier, speaker efficiency, stage environment and monitoring setup, but a quality twin-12-inch cabinet can provide substantial projection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy is the PPC212 heavier than some other 2x12 cabinets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts substantial 18mm birch-ply enclosure and two conventional Vintage 30 speakers contribute to its weight. Players primarily concerned with minimum transport weight may prefer a lighter cabinet using neodymium speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould I choose the PPC212 or PPC212 Open Back?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the closed-back PPC212 when you want tighter bass and stronger forward projection. Choose the open-back version if you favour a wider, more spacious sound and greater room dispersion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of cable should I use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a dedicated speaker cable rated for connecting an amplifier to a speaker cabinet. A regular screened guitar lead is not designed for this purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal Buying Advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock Orange PPC212 Closed Back Guitar Cabinet\u003c\/strong\u003e is a strong choice for anyone wanting a professional 2x12 that delivers serious projection, tight low-end response and the familiar character of twin Celestion Vintage 30 speakers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts \u003cstrong\u003e120-watt handling, 16-ohm impedance, sealed enclosure and 18mm birch-ply construction\u003c\/strong\u003e make it equally at home beneath a serious live amplifier head or in a dedicated recording setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf a compact 1x12 no longer gives you the scale you need but a full 4x12 feels excessive, the PPC212 occupies an excellent middle ground.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Orange","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56240161456508,"sku":"PPC-212-B","price":699.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/Orange-PPC212OB-1-1-1030x1030.png?v=1677073046"},{"product_id":"orange-dual-baby-100-twin-channel-100w-guitar-amp-head-copy","title":"Orange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature 2x12 Valve Combo – B-Stock","description":"\u003ch2\u003eQuick Product Summary\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature\u003c\/strong\u003e is a professional 50-watt all-valve 2x12 guitar combo built around the celebrated Rockerverb 50 MKIII NEO platform and tailored in collaboration with Orianthi. It combines a powerful two-channel valve circuit, 50\/25-watt operation, valve-driven spring reverb, a valve-buffered effects loop and Orange's built-in attenuator with a distinctive white patterned finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLoaded with a pair of \u003cstrong\u003e12-inch Celestion Neo Creamback speakers\u003c\/strong\u003e, the Oriverb is designed to deliver the scale and projection expected from a serious 2x12 valve combo while reducing weight compared with a traditional ceramic-speaker Rockerverb configuration. From spacious cleans and blues-rock breakup through to thick British crunch and saturated lead tones, this is an exceptionally versatile Orange amplifier for stage, studio and serious home setups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis example is offered as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving players the opportunity to own one of Orange's flagship signature valve combos at an attractive alternative to standard new-stock pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/h2CU1TUQAds?si=YDD2kw93ezjzj5hR\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAt A Glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOriverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSignature Artist\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrianthi\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve 2x12 guitar combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean and Dirty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50W \/ 25W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x 12\" Celestion Neo Creamback\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve-driven spring reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve-buffered\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAttenuator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in, footswitchable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite patterned Orianthi Signature finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCondition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain Appeal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRockerverb power and versatility with signature styling and lighter Neo speaker configuration\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest For\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRock, blues, hard rock, alternative, pop, studio recording and professional live use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eB-Stock Condition Report\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCondition Classification: B-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis amplifier is being offered as a \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock Orange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than standard new stock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo item-specific cosmetic blemishes, packaging variations or other B-Stock condition details were supplied for this listing, so no additional condition claims have been added. For precise information about the cosmetic condition of this individual amplifier, our team can provide further guidance before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFunctionality is checked by Fair Deal Music as part of our quality-control process before the amplifier leaves us.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's Included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature 2x12 valve combo amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo additional accessories or packaging have been confirmed for this individual B-Stock example, so they have not been included in the listing specification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier is classified as \u003cstrong\u003eB-Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo specific marks, scratches, cabinet damage or functional issues have been supplied for this example, so none are claimed here.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Quality Control Assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur team checks B-Stock equipment before dispatch to make sure it is operating correctly for its intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a valve amplifier such as the Orange Oriverb, particular attention is given to the amplifier's general operation, control response, channels, speaker output and major onboard functions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis gives you the additional reassurance of purchasing specialist guitar amplification from an experienced independent music retailer rather than an anonymous marketplace seller.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose The Orange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRockerverb DNA With Its Own Identity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Oriverb is based around the \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Rockerverb 50 MKIII NEO\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving it the flexible Clean and Dirty channel architecture that has made the Rockerverb family such a strong choice for professional players. Orange also gives the Orianthi edition its own visual identity and signature voicing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eClean And Dirty Channels For Serious Versatility\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Clean channel provides dedicated Volume, Bass and Treble controls, while the Dirty channel adds Gain plus Bass, Middle and Treble EQ. That makes it easy to move from open, dynamic clean tones to thick crunch and high-gain lead sounds without forcing one EQ setting to serve both channels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e50W Or 25W Valve Power\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelectable \u003cstrong\u003e50-watt and 25-watt operation\u003c\/strong\u003e gives you useful control over the power section. Full power offers maximum clean headroom and stage authority, while half-power mode allows the EL34 output section to work harder at more manageable volume levels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo Celestion Neo Creamback Speakers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Oriverb uses a pair of \u003cstrong\u003e12-inch Celestion Neo Creambacks\u003c\/strong\u003e. Neodymium magnets help reduce overall weight while retaining the full-bodied response required from a performance-oriented 2x12 guitar combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProper Valve-Driven Spring Reverb\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRather than treating reverb as an afterthought, Orange uses a dedicated valve-driven spring reverb circuit. It can add anything from subtle space around clean passages to more expansive ambience for lead work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt-In Attenuator\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange's onboard attenuator gives you another method of controlling output level while retaining the character of a driven amplifier. It is particularly useful when you want the amp working hard without simply relying on the channel volume controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePedal-Friendly Effects Loop\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe valve-buffered effects loop provides a practical place for delay, reverb, modulation and other time-based effects after the preamp distortion, making the Oriverb well suited to more involved pedalboard systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrange Oriverb vs Popular Alternatives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Oriverb vs Rockerverb 50 MKIII NEO\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard Rockerverb 50 MKIII NEO is the closest comparison because it provides the foundation for the Oriverb. Choose the standard version if you primarily want Rockerverb functionality and traditional Orange styling. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003eOriverb\u003c\/strong\u003e if Orianthi's signature version, distinctive white patterned appearance and artist-specific specification are part of the appeal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Oriverb vs Rockerverb 50 MKIII Head\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA Rockerverb head gives you greater freedom to select and change speaker cabinets, which can make sense for players who already own quality cabs. The Oriverb packages the amplifier and matched twin Neo Creambacks into one ready-to-use 2x12 combo, making it particularly appealing for players who want a complete premium rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Oriverb vs Orange Rocker 32\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Rocker 32 is a smaller 30-watt stereo valve combo aimed particularly at players who want to make creative use of stereo pedals and effects. The Oriverb is the stronger choice when your priorities are bigger 2x12 projection, EL34-powered Rockerverb character, greater output and a more comprehensive high-gain platform.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOrange Oriverb vs Orange Super Crush 100 Combo\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Super Crush 100 is a strong alternative for players seeking Orange character from a more affordable solid-state platform. The Oriverb moves into premium all-valve territory with an EL34 output stage, twin Neo Creambacks, valve-driven spring reverb and the responsiveness associated with the Rockerverb family.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is The Orange Oriverb For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Oriverb is particularly well suited to players who need \u003cstrong\u003eone professional valve amplifier to cover clean, crunch and high-gain sounds\u003c\/strong\u003e without building a complicated multi-amp rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is an excellent option for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGigging guitarists needing powerful clean and driven channels\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRock and blues players who value touch-sensitive valve response\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLead guitarists needing sustain and articulate high gain\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedalboard users wanting a quality buffered effects loop\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStudio musicians needing multiple usable voices from one amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange enthusiasts looking for something more distinctive than the standard range\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrianthi fans wanting her full-size signature Orange amplifier\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlayers moving from smaller valve combos into a professional 2x12 platform\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLooking for advice on choosing the right valve amplifier, Orange combo or live guitar rig? Our experienced team of musicians can help by phone, online or in-store.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSuitable Genres And Uses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Oriverb's broad gain range makes it much more than a specialist high-gain amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBlues and blues-rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e The dynamic clean channel and responsive valve power section work well for touch-sensitive playing, while the Dirty channel can be backed down for expressive breakup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eClassic and hard rock:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is natural territory for the EL34-powered platform, giving you muscular rhythm sounds, upper-mid presence and sustaining lead tones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eModern rock and alternative:\u003c\/strong\u003e Higher gain settings provide the saturation and definition needed for heavier rhythm sounds without losing clarity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePop and session work:\u003c\/strong\u003e Independent channels, onboard reverb and an effects loop make it practical for players who need several contrasting sounds during one set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStudio recording:\u003c\/strong\u003e Switchable power, attenuation and the wide gain range provide multiple ways of balancing amplifier response with practical recording volume.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Makes Neo Creamback Speakers Different?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTraditional guitar speakers often use heavier ceramic magnets. \u003cstrong\u003eNeodymium speakers use a much lighter magnetic material\u003c\/strong\u003e, making them particularly attractive in large valve combos where speaker weight contributes significantly to the overall load.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Oriverb, the pair of Celestion Neo Creambacks allows Orange to retain a genuine 2x12 format while making the cabinet easier to transport than a conventional heavyweight Rockerverb combo. For gigging musicians regularly moving their own equipment, that is a meaningful practical advantage rather than simply a specification-sheet feature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStory \u0026amp; Context\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Oriverb comes from one of the most important modern amplifier families in Orange's history. The original \u003cstrong\u003eRockerverb series marked Orange's move into dedicated high-gain valve amplification\u003c\/strong\u003e, developing a reputation among players who wanted traditional Orange character alongside considerably more gain and flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrianthi's signature model takes the later Rockerverb 50 MKIII NEO platform and gives it a distinct identity. Orianthi is known for combining blues-influenced phrasing with technically demanding rock playing and has performed at the highest level as a solo artist as well as working with artists including Michael Jackson and Alice Cooper.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe result is not simply a cosmetic signature edition. The Oriverb combines the Rockerverb's professional twin-channel architecture with Orianthi-specific styling and Orange's signature-model treatment, creating an amplifier designed around clarity, expressive lead work and a broad usable gain range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOrange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAmplifier Format\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2x12 guitar combo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCircuit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll-valve\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Amp Class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClass A\/B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChannels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 – Clean and Dirty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutput Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50W full power \/ 25W half power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeakers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x 12\" Celestion Neo Creamback\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeaker Load\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 ohms total\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean Channel Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVolume, Bass, Treble\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDirty Channel Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGain, Bass, Middle, Treble\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdditional Controls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb, Attenuator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve-driven spring reverb\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEffects Loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eValve-buffered\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAttenuator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in and footswitchable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreamp Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 x ECC83 \/ 12AX7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdditional Preamp\/Reverb Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x ECC81 \/ 12AT7\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Valves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x EL34\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Selection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull \/ Warmup \/ Half Power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtension Speaker Capability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupports an additional 16-ohm speaker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet Construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight birch-ply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite patterned Orianthi Signature covering with black grille\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e66.5 x 53.5 x 30.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpecification Note\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe exact production date, serial number and item-specific B-Stock cosmetic details were not supplied for this listing and have therefore not been guessed or added to the specification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower Requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Oriverb is a mains-powered valve guitar amplifier\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlways connect it using the correct mains supply and correctly rated IEC power connection specified for the amplifier. As with any valve amplifier, correct speaker loading and proper ventilation are important during operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe amplifier provides \u003cstrong\u003e50-watt full-power and 25-watt half-power modes\u003c\/strong\u003e. These alter the operating output of the amplifier but do not turn it into a low-power practice amp, so substantial volume remains available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFair Deal Music Verdict\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003e★★★★★ 5\/5\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature\u003c\/strong\u003e is a premium valve combo for players who love Rockerverb tone but want something considerably more distinctive. The combination of two genuinely useful channels, EL34 power, Neo Creambacks, valve-driven reverb, attenuation and a quality effects loop means it can form the centre of a serious professional guitar rig without requiring a separate head and cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBest suited for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Gigging and recording guitarists wanting versatile premium Orange valve tone in a distinctive 2x12 package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMain benefit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Genuine clean-to-high-gain versatility without sacrificing the character and response expected from a full-size valve amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout feature:\u003c\/strong\u003e The combination of Rockerverb architecture, lightweight Neo Creamback speakers and Orianthi Signature styling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValue proposition:\u003c\/strong\u003e Particularly attractive in B-Stock form for a buyer who wants a flagship-level Orange amplifier but is happy to consider a non-standard-new-stock example.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers usually upgrade from:\u003c\/strong\u003e Smaller Orange valve combos and lower-powered single-speaker amplifiers when they need greater headroom, projection and stage flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMost commonly paired with:\u003c\/strong\u003e Quality overdrive or boost pedals, delay and modulation effects through the effects loop, a compatible Orange footswitch and a suitable protective amplifier cover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOur tip:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do not assume the Dirty channel is only for high gain. Backing off the Gain control and working with your guitar's volume control opens up a wide range of classic crunch and blues-rock sounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShowroom feedback:\u003c\/strong\u003e The Oriverb's strongest practical attraction is the way it combines the scale and authority of a serious 2x12 Orange valve amplifier with a speaker and cabinet design aimed at reducing unnecessary weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Buy From Fair Deal Music?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you buy from Fair Deal Music, you're choosing one of the UK's most established, independent family run music retailers since 1987.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Birmingham showroom has helped generations of musicians find the right instruments, amplifiers and equipment, backed by a knowledgeable musician-led team who understand the products we sell.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you shop with Fair Deal Music, you can buy with confidence thanks to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpert advice from knowledgeable musicians\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCarefully checked new, used, pre-owned, B-Stock and ex-display equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompetitive prices on leading music brands\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure UK-wide delivery\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlexible finance options available, subject to status\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFriendly support before and after your purchase\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSecure online ordering\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA large Birmingham showroom\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDecades of experience with both new and pre-owned musical equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhether you're building your first serious guitar rig, replacing an existing amplifier or looking for a professional touring setup, we're happy to help you make the right choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrade In. Trade Up. Save More.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThinking about upgrading? Your next piece of gear could cost less than you think.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWe're always happy to consider part exchanges and trade-ins on a wide range of musical instruments and equipment. Whether you're looking to upgrade your guitar, keyboard, amplifier, drum kit or studio gear, your existing equipment could help reduce the cost of your next purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSimply get in touch with our team for a no-obligation valuation, and we'll be happy to discuss the options available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt's an easy way to unlock the value of the gear you no longer use while making your next instrument even more affordable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange Oriverb suitable for gigging?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With 50 watts of valve output, a twin 12-inch speaker configuration and separate Clean and Dirty channels, the Oriverb is designed around professional live and studio use. Its attenuator also gives you additional volume control for different venues and situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the Orange Oriverb produce genuinely clean sounds?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The dedicated Clean channel has its own Volume, Bass and Treble controls and is designed to provide substantial clean headroom. This makes the amplifier useful for players who need clean and heavily driven sounds from the same rig.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Oriverb only suitable for Orianthi-style rock tones?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Although designed in collaboration with Orianthi, the underlying Rockerverb platform has a broad gain range. It can cover blues, classic rock, alternative, hard rock and modern high-gain playing as well as cleaner pedal-based setups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use pedals with the Orange Oriverb?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Drive, fuzz, boost and similar pedals can be used into the front of the amplifier, while the valve-buffered effects loop provides a useful position for delay, modulation and other effects that you prefer to place after preamp distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the built-in attenuator do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe attenuator allows you to reduce the amplifier's final output level while running the preamp and power section at more driven settings. It is useful when you want a fuller, pushed amplifier response without simply setting every control extremely low.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the benefit of switching from 50 watts to 25 watts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHalf-power mode changes the response and available clean headroom of the power section as well as reducing maximum output. It is useful for smaller stages, recording sessions and situations where you want to push the amplifier harder without using its full 50-watt output.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I connect an additional speaker cabinet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Oriverb supports connection of an additional 16-ohm speaker load. Always follow the amplifier's marked speaker-output requirements when adding an external cabinet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Orange Oriverb a good amplifier for a large pedalboard?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a strong choice. The dedicated clean channel provides a useful foundation for front-end effects, while the valve-buffered effects loop gives you flexibility with delays, reverbs and modulation effects. Players who use the amplifier's Dirty channel alongside pedals will particularly appreciate having the loop available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFinal Buying Advice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you want the authority of a \u003cstrong\u003efull-size Rockerverb-style 2x12 valve combo\u003c\/strong\u003e, but also want something visually distinctive and easier to transport than a conventional heavyweight design, the \u003cstrong\u003eOrange Oriverb 50 Orianthi Signature\u003c\/strong\u003e deserves serious consideration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIts combination of clean headroom, rich Orange overdrive, high-gain capability, valve spring reverb, attenuation, switchable power and twin Neo Creambacks makes it a genuinely versatile professional amplifier rather than simply an artist collectable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis B-Stock example also creates a strong opportunity for anyone looking to move into one of Orange's premium valve platforms. Speak to the Fair Deal Music team for friendly expert advice, part-exchange options and further information about this individual amplifier.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Orange","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56240173449596,"sku":"RK50C-NEO-MK3-WW-B","price":1675.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/files\/oriverb2.jpg?v=1786962102"},{"product_id":"marshall-origin-ori20c-20w-all-valve-amp-combo-copy","title":"Marshall Origin 20W All Valve Amp Combo OPEN BOX","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color: rgb(43, 0, 255);\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis amp is an on-line return, in 'as new' condition with original packaging and full warranty.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMarshall Amplification's most expressive amp is a single channel all valve tone monster. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: Valve Combo\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower: 20 Watts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePreamp Valves: ECC83 (12AX7)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower Valves: EL34\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeaker: 1 x 10''\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePull Boost: Gain\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEqualisation: Treble, Middle, Bass, Tilt\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOutput: Master, Presence\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e3-Way Output Toggle: High, Mid, Low\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConnectivity: 1\/4'’ Input Jack, 3 x 1\/4'' Loudspeaker Outputs (16-Ohm, 8 Ohms, 8 Ohms), 1\/4'' D.I. Output, 1\/4'' Footswitch Input, 2 x 1\/4'' FX Loop (Send, Return)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThoughts from our Blog\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeaturing our in-house Guitar specialist Gaz Morris\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eI’m aware that with this next sentence I’m going to risk sounding my age but here it goes. Back in the good old days when amps were amps I used a 1974 Marshall JMP100 head (a non-master volume head with four inputs you could bridge together via a patch lead to get more bottom end gain) into a 1968 Marshall basket weave 100 4x12” cabinet, to me, this was THE classic Marshall rig, think Paul Kossoff, Jimmy Page, Jimi Hendrix. It was the embodiment of the widely coined phrase, ‘proper tone’ and boy did it love having pedals in the front of it. The problem with it being that even with two valves removed it was still a monster. It was becoming archaic and increasingly obvious that I had to move on.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eSo began the search for a quieter replacement which took me through a myriad of combos and heads, a list of amps that would go on for days but they just were not THAT Marshall. So I gave up and made do with a close enough alternative but I’ve never quite gotten over that perfect tone from my past and thought I’d never find that level again.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eNow fast forward a couple of months and Marshall contact me, informing me that they were releasing a range of amps that were described as “Classic Marshalls” and to be honest I thought OK a DSL with less gain maybe? After viewing a few videos online with the guys using Strats I thought ok that does sound pretty cool, but I then I got my hands on one of them pre-release, plugged in my trusty Les Paul and unbelievably to my upmost surprise, I got “That Sound”!\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003e I waited with great anticipation for the Marshall Origin series to finally land in-store and as soon as they did I stopped what I was doing (to the dismay of my colleagues), unboxed a 50 watt combo and directed headed off to the quiet room.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eI grabbed the closest Les Paul to mine I could find and turned the gain up, WOW! I pulled the gain boost and I knew that this was going to be something special. I remember saying out loud to myself even though I was on my own, “Let’s see what else you can do” and so I discovered the “Tilt” feature. Do you recall earlier when I mentioned that on my old JMP head that it had four inputs that you could link via a patch lead?\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWell on this 1x12” beast there is a thing called a Tilt control, turn it far left and it’s like I have plugged into the darker input of my old JMP100H, turn it right and you are in the bright input! Excitingly, this features on all the Origin models. Bass, middle and treble are the norm with a presence on the output and this is the first Marshall I’ve not had to turn the treble right down to get a usable tone on in a long time.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThere is an included footswitch that turns on the effects loop and also turns on the, Hurrah a usable boost that’s foot-switchable.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis particular model (50C Combo) has a three stage output 1 watt, 10 watt and 50 watt powered by the classic Marshall 12AX7 and EL34 combination of valves, it’s so handy to have the use of one watt for playing at home and recording. All this tone is driven by a 12” Midnight 60 Celestion speaker.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eSound wise, this has to be the closest I’ve come to the sound I’ve been chasing for years. Add in to the mix it has a master volume and a switchable output stage its near damn perfect.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eIf you like that classic, non fizzy overdrive that I’m sure you craved on the albums that you had when you started playing guitar in the first place (oh yeah I’m old, I listened to Free, Led Zeppelin, Hendrix and Bad Company etc) then look no further it’s here!\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eYes I bought one! In fact, I took it straight to my that very night, obviously I took my other amp just in case it didn’t happen outside the store but my old amp didn’t even get turned on, the Origin 50c has now become my amp of choice I love it. It’s like I’ve come home.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e \u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"text-align: center;\"\u003e\u003ciframe src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/oIVrfybD_2M\" width=\"560\" height=\"315\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Marshall","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":56704416350588,"sku":"ORI20C OPEN BOX","price":419.0,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/products\/origin_20c.jpg?v=1625222627"}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0441\/6457\/9484\/collections\/origin_20c.jpg?v=1785162601","url":"https:\/\/www.fairdealmusic.co.uk\/collections\/easter-amp-sale.oembed","provider":"Fair Deal Music","version":"1.0","type":"link"}